Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby," "Pro Logic," "Surround EX," and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European Patent No. 0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents
pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and
pending. "DTS," "DTS-ES Extended Surround," and "Neo:6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights
reserved.
JBL SIS Products Group
8500 Balboa Boulevard
Northridge, CA 91329
250 Crossways Park Drive
Woodbury, NY 11797
800-336-4JBL
"Lexicon," "LOGIC7," and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553; D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480
and other worldwide patents issued and pending.
© 2003 Harman international Industries, Incorporated, All rights reserved.
This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of JBL Synthesis. The information it contains is subject to change without notice. JBL Synthesis
assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SDP-5
Introduction
Section 1: Getting Started
About the SDP-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Highlights • Product Registration
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
US
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Instrucciones de seguridad importantes . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Instructions importantes relatives à la sécurité. . . . . . . . . vi
Importanti norme di sicurezza. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Instruções importantes de segurança. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Vigtig information om sikkerhed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Tärkeitä turvallisuusohjeita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Viktig informasjon om sikkerhet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Viktiga säkerhetsföreskrifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
DE
ES
FR
IT
Section 2: Basic Operation
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item
Selection • Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix
PT
DK
FI
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
NO
SE
STATUS Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2CH STATUS • DOLBY D STATUS • dts(-ES) STATUS • 5.1a BYPASS STATUS •
2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Auspacken und Überprüfung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Desembalaje e inspección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Disimballaggio ed ispezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Retirando a embalagem e inspecionando . . . . . . . . . . . . x
US
DE
ES
FR
IT
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
STATUS Menu Level Meters
Section 3: SETUP
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PT
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing Input Names (NAME) • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors •
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Zone Settings
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Custom Speaker Setups • THX Speaker Setups • Measuring Speaker Distances •
Calibrating Output Levels
. . . Section 3: SETUP continues on page iv
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
JBL Synthesis
Section 3: SETUP (continued from page iii)
Section 6: Troubleshooting & Maintenance
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
On-Screen Display Setup • Front Panel Display Setup
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Appendix
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Section 4: AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Section 5: MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Index
Listening Mode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode ꢁ and ꢂ Buttons •
Mode Family Selection Buttons
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Back Cover
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
L7 FILM • L7 TV • L7 MUSIC • L7 MUSIC SURR • DOLBY PLII + THX • DOLBY
PLII MOVIE • DOLBY PLII MUSIC • DOLBY PRO LOGIC • dts NEO:6 FILM • dts
NEO:6 MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB • CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL •
PANORAMA • PANORAMA CALIBRATION • PARTY • 2-CHANNEL • MONO
LOGIC • MONO SURROUND • MONO • 5.1 L7 FILM • 5.1 L7 TV • 5.1 L7
MUSIC • 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX • 5.1 THX MUSIC •
DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX • 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC
• 5.1 MONO SURR • 5.1 MONO • dts-ES Decoding • dts(-ES) L7 FILM •
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC • dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX • dts THX MUSIC •
dts(-ES) • dts(-ES) 2-CHAN • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions . . . . 5-28
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SDP-5
ENISH
DEUTSCH
US
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
US
DE
DE
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
•
•
•
Save these instructions for later use.
•
•
•
Bewahren Sie diese Anleitungen zur späteren Benutzung auf.
Follow all instructions and warnings marked on the unit.
Befolgen Sie alle Anleitungen und alle Warnhinweise auf dem Gerät
Always use with the correct line voltage. Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions
for power requirements. Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use
of a different line cord and/or attachment plug.
Betreiben Sie das Gerät immer mit der korrekten Netzspannung. Angaben über den
Strombedarf entnehmen Sie bitte den Betriebsanweisungen des Herstellers. Bei
unterschiedlichen Betriebsspannungen kann die Verwendung anderer Netzkabel und/oder
Anschlußstecker erforderlich werden.
•
•
Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or directly above heat-producing equipment
such as power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in
the product specification.
•
•
Bauen Sie das Gerät nie in ein unbelüftetes Rack oder direkt über Wärme erzeugenden
Geräten wie Verstärkern ein. Beachten Sie die in der Produktspezifikation aufgeführte
maximale Umgebungstemperatur für den Betrieb.
Slots and openings on the case are provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation
and prevent it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. Never
push objects of any kind through any of the ventilation slots. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the unit.
Schlitze und Öffnungen in der Box dienen der Belüftung, damit das Gerät zuverlässig läuft
und sich nicht überhitzt. Diese Öffnungen dürfen nicht abgedeckt oder blockiert werden.
Auch dürfen keine Gegenstände in sie hineingesteckt werden. Verschütten Sie niemals
Flüssigkeiten, gleich welcher Art, auf das Gerät.
•
•
Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit’s connectors.
•
•
Schließen Sie niemals Stromausgänge des Audioverstärkers direkt an das Gerät an.
To prevent shock or fire hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture, or operate it
where it will be exposed to water.
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen oder Brandgefahr darf das Gerät weder Regen
noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt oder an Orten betrieben werden, wo es mit Wasser in
Berührung kommen kann.
•
•
Do not attempt to operate the unit if it has been dropped, damaged, exposed to liquids, or
if it exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating the need for service.
•
•
Versuchen Sie nie, das Gerät zu betreiben, wenn es fallen gelassen, beschädigt oder
Flüssigkeiten ausgesetzt wurde oder wenn ein deutlicher Leistungsunterschied zu
verzeichnen ist, der darauf hinweist, dass es gewartet werden muss.
This unit should only be opened by qualified service personnel. Removing covers will
expose you to hazardous voltages.
Dieser Apparat sollte nur von qualifizierten Fachleuten geöffnet werden. Das Abnehmen
von Abdeckungen setzt Sie gefährlichen Spannungen aus.
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to the presence of
uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside the enclosure…voltage that may be sufficient
to constitute a risk of shock.
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, warnt Sie vor dem
Vorhandensein nicht isolierter gef hrlicher Spannung im Gerät. Diese Spannung
kann so hoch sein, dass das Risiko eines Stromschlags besteht.
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature.
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, macht Sie auf wichtige
Betriebs- und Wartungshinweise in diesen Hinweisen aufmerksam.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
JBL Synthesis
ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
ES
ES
FR
FR
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES
INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES RELATIVES
À LA SÉCURITÉ
•
•
Guarde estas instrucciones para futuras referencias.
•
•
Conservez ces instructions pour pouvoir vous y référer ultérieurement.
Siga todas las instrucciones y tenga en cuenta las advertencias que aparecen en la
unidad y en las instrucciones de funcionamiento.
Suivez toutes ces instructions et tenez compte de tous les avertissements indiqués sur
l’appareil et dans la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.
•
Utilice siempre la tensión de línea correcta. Consulte las instrucciones del fabricante,
donde se especifican los requisitos de alimentación. Tenga en cuenta que unas tensiones
operativas diferentes pueden precisar de la utilización de diferentes cables de
alimentación y/o enchufes.
•
•
•
Utilisez toujours la tension secteur correcte. Consultez les instructions du fabricant
précisant les caractéristiques d’alimentation à respecter. Attention, le type de cordon
secteur et/ou de prise secteur peut varier selon des tensions en vigueur dans l’installation.
•
•
No instale la unidad en un rack sin ventilación, o directamente sobre equipos que generen
calor, como amplificadores de potencia. Tenga en cuenta la temperatura operativa
ambiental máxima que se detalla en las especificaciones del producto.
N’installez pas l’appareil dans un rack mal ventilé ou directement au-dessus d’un appareil
dégageant de la chaleur comme un amplificateur de puissance. Respectez la température
maximale de fonctionnement précisée dans les caractéristiques techniques.
Las ranuras y aberturas del equipo son para su ventilación - para garantizar un
funcionamiento fiable y evitar que la unidad se sobrecaliente, no bloquee, cubra o inserte
objetos en las aberturas. No derrame nunca líquidos de ningún tipo sobre la unidad.
Les ouvertures dans le boîtier assurent la bonne ventilation de l’appareil, évitent toute
surchauffe et assurent le bon fonctionnement du système. Veillez à ne pas obstruer,
couvrir ou insérer d’objets dans ces ouvertures. Veillez à ne pas renverser de liquide sur
l’appareil.
•
•
•
Nunca conecte directamente salidas de amplificadores de potencia de audio a ninguno de
los conectores de la unidad.
•
•
•
Ne reliez jamais directement les sorties audio des amplificateurs de puissance aux
connecteurs de l’appareil.
Para evitar descargas eléctricas o incendios, no exponga la unidad a la humedad o la
lluvia, ni la utilice donde pueda estar expuesta al agua.
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie, n’exposez pas l’appareil à la pluie
ou à l’humidité; ne l’utilisez pas dans des endroits exposés aux projections de liquides.
No intente utilizar la unidad si ésta ha caído, se ha dañado, ha estado expuesta a líquidos,
o si muestra un cambio importante en sus prestaciones, lo cual indicaría la necesidad de
una reparación.
N’essayez pas d’utiliser l’appareil si celui-ci est tombé, a été endommagé, exposé à des
projections de liquides ou si vous constatez des dysfonctionnements nécessitant
l’intervention d’un technicien spécialisé.
•
Das esta unidad deberá ser abierta únicamente por personal calificado. Si usted quita las
coberturas se expondrá a voltajes peligrosos.
•
Cet appareil ne doit être ouvert que par un personnel de service qualifié. En enlevant les
couvercles vous vous exposez à des tensions électriques dangereuses.
Este triangulo, que aparece en su componente, alerta de la presencia de una tensin
peligrosa no aislada en el interior del equipo - una tensi nique puede ser suficiente
como para constituir un riesgo de descarga electrica.
Le symbole de l’ clair fl ch dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr
sence l’int rieur de l’appareil de tensions non isol es susceptibles de constituer un
risque d’electrocution.
Este triangulo, que aparece en su equipo, le alerta de instrucciones operativas y de
mantenimiento importantes en los documentos que acompa an el producto.
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr
sence de nombreuses instructions de maintenance dans le manuel fourni avec
l’appareil.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SDP-5
ITALIANO
PORTUGUESE
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
IT
IT
PT
PT
IMPORTANTI NORME DI SICUREZZA
•
•
Conservare le presenti norme per l’utilizzo futuro.
•
•
Guarde essas instruções para uso posterior.
Seguire sempre tutte le istruzioni e gli avvertimenti segnati sull’unità e nelle istruzioni
operative.
Siga todas as instruções e fique atento aos avisos marcados na unidade e nas instruções
de operação.
•
•
•
Utilizzare sempre la corretta tensione di alimentazione. Fare riferimento al manuale del
costruttore per le caratteristiche di alimentazione. Tensioni di rete diverse necessitano
anche di un diverso cavo con spine differenti.
•
•
•
Sempre use com a voltagem correta. Veja no manual de instruções do fabricante qual a
alimentação necessária. Lembre-se que voltagens de operação diferentes podem
precisar de um cabo ou plug diferentes.
Non installare l’unità in un rack poco ventilato, o direttamente sopra apparecchiature che
producono calore, come amplificatori di potenza. Controllare la massima temperatura
ambientale di esercizio sulle specifiche tecniche del prodotto.
Não instale a unidade em um suporte sem ventilação ou diretamente acima de
equipamentos que produzam calor, como transformadores. Observe a temperatura
ambiente máxima de operação indicada na especificação do produto.
Fori ed aperture nei pannelli sono necessari per garantire un corretta ventilazione e
prevenire surriscaldamenti. Queste aperture non devono essere coperte o ostruite. Non
inserire oggetti di alcun tipo nei fori di ventilazione. Evitare il contatto con liquidi di
qualsiasi genere.
O revestimento da unidade é provido de fendas e aberturas para ventilação – para
assegurar uma operação confiável e evitar que a unidade se superaqueça. Não bloqueie,
cubra ou insira objetos nas aberturas. Nunca derrube líquido de qualquer espécie na
unidade.
•
•
•
Evitare di collegare le uscite di un amplificatore di potenza direttamente a qualsiasi
connettore dell’unità.
•
•
•
Nunca ligue saídas de amplificadores de áudio diretamente a qualquer dos conectores da
unidade.
Per evitare il rischio di scosse elettriche non esporre il prodotto a pioggia o umidità. Evitare
l’uso dove possa essere esposto all’acqua.
Para evitar danos de choque ou fogo, não exponha a unidade à chuva ou umidade, ou
opere-a onde haja exposição à água.
Non tentare di utilizzare il prodotto se è caduto, se è stato a contatto con liquidi, o mostra
chiari segni di danneggiamento o cambio di prestazioni che indicano la necessità di
assistenza tecnica.
Não tente operar a unidade se ela for derrubada, danificada, exposta à líquidos ou
apresente uma mudança de performance notável, indicando a necessidade de
manutenção.
•
Ogni intervento sull’unità va eseguito esclusivamente da personale qualificato. La
rimozione della copertura comporta l’esposizione al pericolo di folgorazione.
•
Esta unidade só deveria ser aberta através de pessoal de serviço qualificado. Removendo
coberturas o exporão a voltagens perigosas.
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte la presenza di tensioni
pericolose non isolate all interno della copertura – tali tensioni rappresentano un
pericolo di folgorazione.
Esse triângulo que aparece no seu console, alerta para a presença de voltagem
perigosa e não isolada no recinto – voltagem que pode ser suficiente para constituir
um risco de choque.
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte l’utente della presenza nella
documentazione allegata di importanti istruzioni relative al funzionamento ed alla
manutenzione.
Esse triângulo ques aparece no seu console alerta para instruções importantes de
operação e manutenção neste manual.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
JBL Synthesis
DANSK
SUOMI
DK
DK
FI
FI
VIGTIG INFORMATION OM SIKKERHED
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
•
•
•
Gem denne vejledning til senere brug.
Følg alle anvisninger og advarsler på apparatet.
•
•
•
Säilytä nämä ohjeet tulevaa käyttöä varten.
Seuraa kaikkia yksikköön merkittyjä ohjeita ja varoituksia.
Apparatet skal altid tilsluttes den korrekte spænding. Der henvises til brugsanvisningen,
der indeholder specifikationer for strømforsyning. Der gøres opmærksom på, at ved
varierende driftsspændinger kan det blive nødvendigt at bruge andre lednings- og/eller
stiktyper.
Käytä aina oikeaa verkkojännitettä. Tehovaatimukset selviävät valmistajan käyttöohjeista.
Huomaa, että eri käyttöjännitteet saattavat vaatia toisenlaisen verkkojohdon ja/tai
-pistokkeen käytön.
•
•
Älä asenna yksikköä telineeseen jossa ei ole tuuletusta, tai välittömästi lämpöä tuottavien
laitteiden, esim. tehovahvistimien, yläpuolelle.Ympäristön lämpötila käytössä ei saa ylittää
tuotespesifikaation maksimilämpötilaa.
•
•
Apparatet må ikke monteres i et kabinet uden ventilation eller lige over andet udstyr, der
udvikler varme, f.eks. forstærkere. Den maksimale omgivelsestemperatur ved drift, der
står opført i specifikationerne, skal overholdes.
Kotelo on varustettu tuuletusreiillä ja -aukoilla. Luotettavan toiminnan varmistamiseksi ja
ylilämpenemisen välttämiseksi näitä aukkoja ei saa sulkea tai peittää. Mitään esineitä ei
saa työntää tuuletusaukkoihin. Mitään nesteitä ei saa kaataa yksikköön.
Der er ventilationsåbninger i kabinettet. For at sikre apparatets drift og hindre over
phedning må disse åbninger ikke blokeres eller tildækkes. Stik aldrig noget ind igennem
ventilationsåbningerne, og pas på aldrig at spilde nogen form for væske på apparatet.
•
•
Älä kytke audiotehovahvistimen lähtöjä suoraan mihinkään yksikön liittimeen.
•
•
Udgangsstik fra audioforstærkere må aldrig sættes direkte i apparatet.
Sähköiskun ja palovaaran välttämiseksi yksikkö ei saa olla sateessa tai kosteassa, eikä
sitä saa käyttää märässä ympäristössä.
Apparatet må ikke udsættes for regn eller fugt og må ikke bruges i nærheden af vand for
at undgå risiko for elektrisk stød og brand.
•
•
Älä käytä yksikköä jos se on pudonnut, vaurioitunut, kostunut, tai jos sen suorituskyky on
huomattavasti muuttunut, mikä vaatii huoltoa.
•
•
Apparatet må aldrig bruges, hvis det er blevet stødt, beskadiget eller vådt, eller hvis
ændringer i ydelsen tyder på, at det trænger til eftersyn.
Yksikön saa avata vain laitteeseen perehtynyt huoltohenkilö. Kansien poisto altistaa sinut
vaarallisille jännitteille.
Dette apparat må kun åbnes af fagfolk. Hvis dækslet tages af, udsættes man for livsfarlig
højspænding.
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, varoittaa sinua eristämättömän
vaarallisen jännitteen esiintymisestä yksikön sisällä. Tämä jännite saattaa olla
riittävän korkea aiheuttamaan sähköiskuvaaran.
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om uisoleret, farlig spænding i apparatet -
høj nok til at give elektrisk stød.
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om vigtig driftsog vedligeholdsinformation
i den tilhørende litteratur.
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, kertoo sinulle, että tässä
tuotedokumentoinnissa esiintyy tärkeitä käyttö- ja ylläpito-ohjeita.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SDP-5
NORSK
SVENSKA
NO
NO
SE
SE
VIKTIG INFORMASJON OM SIKKERHET
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSFÖRESKRIFTER
•
•
•
Ta vare på denne veiledningen for senere bruk.
Følg alle anvisningene og advarslene som er angitt på apparatet.
•
•
•
Spara dessa föreskrifter för framtida bruk.
Följ alla anvisningar och varningar som anges på enheten.
Apparatet skal alltid anvendes med korrekt spenning. Produktbeskrivelsen inneholder
spesifikasjoner for strømkrav. Vær oppmerksom på at det ved ulike driftsspenninger kan
være nødvendig å bruke en annen ledning- og/eller støpseltype.
Använd alltid rätt nätspänning. Se tillverkarens bruksanvisningar för information om
effektkrav. Märkväl, att andra matningsspänningar eventuellt kräver att en annan typs
nätsladd och/eller kontakt används.
•
•
Apparatet skal ikke monteres i skap uten ventilasjon, eller direkte over varmeproduserende
utstyr, som for eksempel kraftforsterkere. Den maksimale romtemperaturen som står
oppgitt i produktbeskrivelsen, skal overholdes.
•
•
Installera inte enheten i ett oventilerat stativ, eller direkt ovanför utrustningar som avger
värme, t ex effektförstärkare. Se till att omgivningens temperatur vid drift inte överskrider
det angivna värdet i produktspecifikationen.
Apparatet er utstyrt med ventilasjonsåpninger. For at apparatet skal være pålitelig i bruk
og ikke veropphetes, må disse åpningene ikke blokkeres eller tildekkes. Stikk aldri noe inn
i ventilasjonsåpningene, og pass på at det aldri søles noen form for væske på apparatet.
Behållaren är försedd med hål och öppningar för ventilering. För att garantera tillförlitlig
funktion och förhindra överhettning får dessa öppningar inte blockeras eller täckas. Inga
föremål får skuffas in genom ventilationshålen. Inga vätskor får spillas på enheten.
•
•
Utgangsplugger fra audioforsterkere skal aldri koples direkte til apparatet.
•
•
Anslut aldrig audioeffektförstärkarutgångar direkt till någon av enhetens kontakter.
Unngå brannfare og elektrisk støt ved å sørge for at apparatet ikke utsettes for regn eller
fuktighet og ikke anvendes i nærheten av vann.
För att undvika elstöt eller brandfara får enheten inte utsättas för regn eller fukt, eller
användas på ställen där den blir våt.
•
•
Apparatet skal ikke brukes hvis det har blitt utsatt for støt, er skadet eller blitt vått, eller hvis
endringer i ytelsen tyder på at det trenger service.
•
•
Använd inte enheten om den har fallit i golvet, skadats, blivit våt, eller om dess prestanda
förändrats märkbart, vilket kräver service.
Dette apparatet skal kun åpnes av fagfolk. Hvis dekselet fjernes, utsettes man for livsfarlig
høyspenning.
Enheten får öppnas endast av behörig servicepersonal. Farliga spänningar blir tillgängliga
när locken tas bort.
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som er en advarsel om at det finnes
uisolert, farlig spenning inne i kabinettet - høy nok til å utgjøre en fare for elektrisk
støt.
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, varnar dig om en oisolerad farlig
spänning inne i enheten. Denna spänning är eventuellt så hög att fara för elstöt
föreligger.
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som betyr at den tilhørende
litteraturen inneholder viktige opplysninger om drift og ved.
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, anger att viktiga bruksanvisningar och
serviceanvisningar ingår i dokumentationen i fråga.
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
JBL Synthesis
US
Unpacking and Inspection
FR
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection
After unpacking the unit, save all packing materials in case the unit
ever needs to be shipped. Thoroughly inspect the modules and
packing materials for signs of damage. Report any damage to the
carrier at once; report equipment malfunction to the dealer.
Après avoir ouvert l’emballage, conservez-le pour tout retour.
Inspectez avec soin les modules et les matériaux d’emballage pour
tout signe de dommage. Veuillez rapporter immédiatement les
dommages auprès du transporteur. Les dysfonctionnements du
matériel doivent être signalés à votre revendeur.
DE
Auspacken und Überprüfung
IT
Disimballaggio ed ispezione
Bewahren Sie nach dem Auspacken des Geräts das
Verpackungsmaterial für den Fall auf, dass Sie das Gerät wieder
versenden müssen. Überprüfen Sie die Module und die Verpackung
sorgfältig auf Anzeichen von Beschädigung. Etwaige Schäden sind
dem Transporteur unverzüglich anzuzeigen; Funktionsstörungen
sind dem zuständigen Händler zu melden.
Dopo aver disimballato l’unità, salvi tutto il materiale d’imballaggio,
in caso Lei abbia bisogno di spedire l’unità. Ispezioni attentamente
i moduli ed il materiale d’imballaggio per vedere se riportano
segni di danno. Riporti subito ogni segno di danno al corriere;
riferisca il malfunzionamento dell’attrezzatura al suo rivenditore.
ES
Desembalaje e inspección
PT
Retirando a embalagem e inspecionando
Después de desembalar la unidad, guarde todos los materiales de
embalaje por si alguna vez transportar la unidad. Inspeccione con
atención los módulos y los materiales de embalaje para comprobar
que no muestren desperfectos. Informe inmediatamente de
cualquier desperfecto al transportista; informe de cualquier
problema de funcionamiento del equipo a su distribuidor.
Depois de desembalar a unidade, guarde a embalagem caso precise
enviar a unidade para manutenção. Inspecione cuidadosamente o
módulo e a embalagem procurando sinais de dano. Avise à loja
qualquer tipo de dano ou mal funcionamento do equipamento.
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Getting Started
About the SDP-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Highlights • Product Registration
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
JBL Synthesis
With four floating-point SHARC™ digital signal processing (DSP)
engines, the SDP-5 boasts enormous processing power. These
powerful processors perform custom processing such as LOGIC7
decoding, bass enhancement, dialog enhancement, auto azimuth,
5-speaker enhancement, bass management, high-precision digital
crossovers, and audio controls. These features are available at
sample rates up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to retain top
performance from all sources. In addition, a fifth DSP engine is
dedicated to decoding multi-channel compressed audio sources.
ABOUT THE SDP-5
Thank you for purchasing the SDP-5 Digital Controller, an 8-
channel audio and video control center with independent zone
monitoring that provides control of audio and video source
selection in two zones at the same time. The SDP-5 includes eight
configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight
digital audio, eight analog audio, five composite video, five S-video,
or three component video input connectors. The analog connectors
can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.
The SDP-5 is one of the most advanced audio and video control
centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can
be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital
signals, allowing the SDP-5 to provide the benefits of precise digital
signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. Alternatively,
stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion and internal
processing, following a pure signal path directly to the output
connectors.
Inside and out, the SDP-5 is designed for possible future
developments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector
capable of performing configuration downloads and flash memory
software upgrades and another capable of supporting future
developments. The rear panel also includes two removable access
panels to accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.
More than just an audio and video control center, the SDP-5 offers
the latest version of the critically acclaimed LOGIC7® decoding,
which creates a 7.1-channel output signal from stereo, 5.1-, and
6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, LOGIC7 decoding is
compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.
Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, LOGIC7 is
widely regarded as the finest available.
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase
lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection. Auto
azimuth technology corrects timing and level imbalances in stereo
sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate playback of surround-
encoded sources. A digital audio pass-through output is available for
recording digital signals with a CD recorder or a similar component.
In addition to LOGIC7, the SDP-5 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,
Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic, dts 96/24, dts NEO:6, dts-ES,
THX Ultra2, and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2 Certification
guarantees that the SDP-5 meets the highest THX specifications.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
SDP-5
Complementing its audio performance, the SDP-5 features two
broadcast-quality video switchers. A wide-bandwidth component
video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals,
while a composite and S-video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC,
PAL, or SECAM video signals. The component video switcher can
pass High-Definition TV (HDTV) signals, as well as Standard-
Definition TV signals. Both switchers are designed to pass video
signals without alteration or degradation.
Built to professional standards, the SDP-5 is designed to serve as the
control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most
demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique
combination of power, performance, flexibility, and technological
sophistication. With extensive expansion capabilities, the SDP-5
represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face of
rapidly emerging technologies.
HIGHLIGHTS
•
•
•
•
8 channels
•
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro Logic II, and Dolby
Pro Logic decoding
8 configurable inputs
2 independent zones
dts 96/24, dts-ES (discrete and matrix), and dts NEO:6
decoding
4 S/PDIF coaxial and 4 S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio
input connectors
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding
THX Ultra2 Certification
•
•
•
•
24-bit/192kHz D/A converters for all audio channels
Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors
Analog bypass option for stereo audio input connectors
Flash memory software upgrade capabilities
2 internal expansion slots for future possibilities
Digital audio output connector
RS-232 control
Auto switching between digital and analog audio input
connectors
•
3 component video input connectors with full HDTV
compatibility
Rear panel IR input connector
2 trigger output connectors
•
•
•
•
•
•
5 S-video input connectors
19-inch rack-mount kit
5 composite video input connectors
Four 32-bit DSP engines
Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio sources
Broadcast-quality video switching
LOGIC7 decoding
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
JBL Synthesis
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
Do Not . . .
The SDP-5 requires special care during installation to ensure
optimal performance. Pay particular attention to the bulleted items
that begin below and to other precautions that appear throughout
this user guide.
•
•
•
Place the SDP-5 on a thick rug or carpet or cover the SDP-5
with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.
Place the SDP-5 on a windowsill or in another location in which
it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Do . . .
•
Install the SDP-5 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or
shelf or in a standard 19-inch equipment rack using the
enclosed rack-mount kit.
Obstruct the front panel IR receiver window shown on page
2-3. The remote control must be in line of sight with the IR
receiver for proper operation. Refer to page 2-9 for more
information about remote control operation considerations.
•
Select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.
Do Not . . .
•
•
•
•
Install the SDP-5 on a surface that is unstable or unable to
support all four of its feet, unless it is installed in an equipment
rack.
Stack the SDP-5 directly above heat-producing equipment
such as power amplifiers or other components that generate
heat during use.
Before moving the SDP-5, make sure it is powered off with the
rear panel power switch. Then, make sure the power cord is
unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION
Expose the SDP-5 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,
smoke, dampness, or excessive dust. Avoid installing the
SDP-5 near radiators and other heat-producing appliances.
Install the SDP-5 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable TV
decoders, and other RF-emitting devices that might cause
interference.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
SDP-5
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION
The remote control requires two AA batteries that should be replaced as needed. It is recommended to use Alkaline batteries, which last longer
without leaking. When the batteries are low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it from operating the
SDP-5. When this occurs, follow the instructions below to replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when the new batteries are
installed.
To replace the remote control batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Then, remove the battery compartment cover as shown in the figure
below (left). To do this, press the tab attached to the cover. When the tab is pressed, pull the cover away from the remote control.
2. Remove old batteries inserted in the compartment (if applicable).
3. Insert two AA batteries in the compartment as shown in the figure below (center). Make sure the batteries are correctly inserted observing
the proper polarity.
4. When new batteries have been installed, close the battery compartment cover as shown in the figure below (right). To do this, align the
cover with the guide on the back of the remote control. When the cover is aligned, press the cover until it "snaps" into place.
5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Basic Operation
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item Selection •
Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
STATUS Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2CH STATUS • DOLBY D STATUS • dts(-ES) STATUS • 5.1a BYPASS STATUS •
2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
STATUS Menu Level Meters
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW
2
3
5
7
9
Main
Zone 2
DVD1
DVD2
CD
Sat
VCR
Aux
DVD1
DVD2
Sat
VCR
Aux
Mode
TV
Tuner
TV
CD
Tuner
SDP-5 Digital Surround Processor/Controller
Mute
Off
Off
1
4
6
8
10
standby button activates standby mode and deactivates the
SDP-5. The red standby button LED lights to indicate that
standby mode is activated.
1. Standby Button
Activates and deactivates standby mode when the SDP-5 is
powered on with the rear panel power switch (2-5). The
standby button performs no function when the SDP-5 is
powered off with the rear panel power switch.
2. Front Panel Display
Indicates the current input, listening mode, input source, and
volume level as shown above. This 2 x 20 character display can
also be used to view messages and menus, one line at a time.
Refer to the Menu Navigation section that begins on page 2-9
for more information.
When standby mode is activated, pressing the standby button
deactivates standby mode and activates the SDP-5, including
all zones that were activated during the previous operating
session. When standby mode is deactivated, pressing the
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
To use the volume knob to adjust Zone 2 volume level:
3. IR Receiver
1. Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 input selection
button that corresponds with the current input source. For
instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1
input, press and hold the Zone 2 DVD1 input selection
button.
Receives infrared commands
from the SDP-5 remote
control (2-9). There are
three LEDS located in this
area as shown at the right.
An amber LED blinks when
a remote control command is received. A red LED lights when
the A/D converters are overloading. And, a blue LED lights
when the SDP-5 is powered on and activated – even if the
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to
ALWAYS OFF (3-52).
Red LED
Blue LED
Amber LED
2. While holding the selected Zone 2
ZONE2 VOLUME -37dB
input selection button, rotate the
volume knob clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB
increments. The horizontal bar graph (2-10) shown at the
right appears on the on-screen and front panel displays.
This graph illustrates the position at which the current
Zone 2 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB
volume range.
4. Volume Knob
Adjusts volume level in the Main Zone or Zone 2.
3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when
Zone 2 volume level has been set.
Note:
When SDP-5 output levels have been properly
calibrated (3-39), the +0dB volume level setting
corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).
Note:
Remote control input selection buttons cannot be
used to select Zone 2 volume level adjustment, even
if the Zone 2 command bank is activated.
To use the volume knob to adjust Main Zone volume level:
Rotate the volume knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease volume level in 1dB
increments. The horizontal bar graph (2-10) shown at the
right appears on the on-screen and front panel displays.
This graph illustrates the position at which the current
Main Zone volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB
volume range.
VOLUME
-37dB
5. Mode ꢀ and ꢁ Buttons
Scroll to the previous (ꢀ) and the next (ꢁ) available listening
mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE
ADJUST menu (5-2). Refer to the Listening Mode Activation
section that begins on page 5-2 for more information.
. . . Front Panel Overview continues on page 2-4
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
Front Panel Overview (continued from page 2-3)
6. Mute Button
9. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons
Mutes Main Zone volume level and restores Main Zone volume
to its original level. Pressing the Mute button the first time
lowers Main Zone volume level. The message "MUTE ON"
appears on the on-screen and front panel displays. Pressing the
Mute button again restores Main Zone volume to its original
level. Refer to page 3-53 for information about using the
MUTE LEVEL parameter to set mute levels.
Selects the input in Zone 2. When an input is selected, an
amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.
When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input selection
button activates Zone 2 and selects the corresponding input.
The Main Zone remains deactivated until a Main Zone input is
selected.
The amber Mute button LED lights whenever mute is activated,
whether activated automatically or manually. For instance, the
SDP-5 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or
listening modes.
10.Zone 2 Off Button
Deactivates Zone 2.
7. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons
Selects the input in the Main Zone. When an input is selected,
a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.
When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone
input selection button activates the Main Zone and selects
the corresponding input. Zone 2 remains deactivated until a
Zone 2 input is selected.
8. Main Zone Off Button
Deactivates the Main Zone.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
REAR PANEL OVERVIEW
5. Analog Audio Input Connectors
Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone and Zone 2. Eight
stereo analog audio input connectors labeled 1 to 8 are
available. The connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 and 6, 7, and 8
can be configured as 5.1-channel connectors. When a 5.1-
channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone, input
signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as
indicated below. When a 5.1-channel analog source is present
in the Main Zone and the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN
parameter is set to DMIX, only the (L) and (R) input signals are
sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. Refer to page
3-45 for more information.
Note:
The numbered items that begin below correspond to
the rear panel illustration on the next page.
1. Power Switch
Connects power to the AC input connector and disconnects
power from the AC input connector. The c represents the "off"
position and the|represents the "on" position. When the
SDP-5 is powered on, the front panel standby button or
remote control On button can be used to activate and deacti-
vate standby mode. When the SDP-5 is powered off, standby
mode is not available.
Input Connector
Output Connector
Front L
(L)
(R)
Front R
(C)
Center
2. AC Input Connector
(SUB)
(LS)
(RS)
Subwoofer
Provides power to the SDP-5 through the supplied power cord
(3 wire, 10 amp, IEC 320).
Side L and Rear L
Side R and Rear R
3. Digital Audio Input Connectors (S/PDIF)
6. Main Zone Audio Output Connectors
Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone. Four S/PDIF
coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are
available. These connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1,
48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) sources.
These connectors are not compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.
Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight
connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and
Rear L/R are available.
4. Digital Audio Output Connector (S/PDIF)
Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial
connector is available.
. . . Rear Panel Overview continues on page 2-6
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
Rear Panel Overview (continued from page 2-5)
12
3
9
10 11
15
1
SDP-5 Digital Surround Processor/Controller
INPUTS
3
MAIN
ZONE 2
S/PDIF INPUTS
2
JBL, Inc. Northridge, CA
Assembled in USA
COMPONENT VIDEO
1
3
2
4
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
TUV
Y
Y
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
PR
PR
PB
PB
C
US
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
VIDEO
VIDEO
CAUTION
S/N
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Y
3
4
ATTENTION
RISQUE DE CHOC
ELECTRIQUE
OUTPUT
CENTER
INPUT 3
7
NE PAS OUVRIR
IR IN
3
6
8
FRONT
SIDE
REAR
AUDIO
TRIGGER
OUTPUTS
(L)
(C)
(LS)
(RS)
(L)
(R)
(C)
(LS)
(RS)
L
L
L
S/PDIF
OUT
1
2
RS-232
(R)
(SUB)
(SUB)
R
R
R
SUBWOOFER
2
1
OUTPUTS
AC 100-240V ~ 0-60 HZ, 60W
4
14
13
5
6
7
2
Never make or break connections to the
SDP-5 unless the SDP-5 and all
associated components are powered off.
CAUTION
7.
Zone 2 Audio Output Connectors
Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two connectors
labeled Audio are available. Alternatively, these connectors can
be used to connect a recording device. When the Zone 2 audio
output connectors are sent to a recording device, it is
recommended to set the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu
ZONE PWR ON parameter to +0dB to achieve appropriate
recording levels. The Zone 2 audio output connectors provide
variable output levels. Adjusting Zone 2 volume level will affect
the recording.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
9. Video Input Connectors
13.RS-232 Connectors
Provide video input in the Main Zone and Zone 2. Five
composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, five S-video
connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5, and three component video
connectors labeled 1 to 3 are available. The component video
connectors are not available for Zone 2.
The RS-232 connector labeled 1 provides serial control. It is
capable of performing configuration downloads and flash
memory software upgrades. The RS-232 connector labeled 2 is
capable of supporting future developments.
14.Trigger Output Connectors
Provide 12V DC output to control connected components.
Two trigger output connectors are available on a 5-pin DIN
connector. The connector labeled PWR – the power trigger
output connector – is not configurable. It is activated when the
SDP-5 is activated, and deactivated when the SDP-5 is
deactivated. The trigger output connector labeled 1 can be
configured for remote or program operation. Refer to page
3-54 for more information.
10.Main Zone Video Output Connectors
Provide video output in the Main Zone. One composite video
connector, one S-video connector, and one component video
connector are available.
11.Zone 2 Video Output Connectors
Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video
connector and one S-video connector are available.
Alternatively, these connectors can be used to connect a video
recording device.
GROUND
TRIGGER 2
GROUND
TRIGGER 1
POWER TRIGGER
Note:
•
•
•
Composite video output connectors are available
when a composite or S-video source is present.
Note:
S-video output connectors are available when an
S-video source is present.
The default trigger configuration shown on page
3-55 includes settings designed for use in JBL
Synthesis systems with switching transducers for
listening modes.
Component video output connectors are available
when a component video source is present.
12.IR IN Connector
15.Removable Access Panels
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution
equipment. One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/
Ring connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is
available.
Accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW
MAIN MENU
The SDP-5 remote control provides full operation of the SDP-5,
performing commands such as menu navigation that are not
available from the front panel. The command matrix that begins
on page 2-13 indicates the commands remote control buttons
perform when each command bank is active. The numbered items
in the matrix correspond with the remote control illustrations on
pages 2-13 to 2-16.
The MAIN MENU shown at the right
represents the beginning of the menu
structure. It can be used to open the three
main menu branches: MODE ADJUST,
AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP. Refer to
Sections 5, 4, and 3 for information about
these menu branches.
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
Refer to the Menu Navigation table on the next page for
instructions to open and close the MAIN MENU.
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
The bulleted items that begin below describe factors that can
improve or impede remote control operation. It is recommended
to observe these items as well as the battery installation instructions
on page 1-5 before operating the remote control.
MENU NAVIGATION
The remote control Menu arrows must be used to navigate the
extensive menu structure shown in the Appendix (A-4 to A-13).
The table on the next page indicates the navigation functions
remote control Menu arrows perform when the Main Zone
command bank is activated.
Please note the following before operating the SDP-5 remote
control:
•
•
The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front
panel IR receiver (2-3). Eliminate obstructions between the
remote control and the IR receiver. The remote control might
become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is
shining on the IR receiver.
MENU ITEM SELECTION
The remote control Menu arrows must be used to select menu items.
For optimal performance, position the remote control at a
30 degree angle no more than 17 feet (5m) from the SDP-5. If
the SDP-5 is placed inside a glass cabinet, smoked glass will
reduce the remote control range.
To select a menu item on the open menu:
1. Press the remote control Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to highlight
the desired menu item.
•
•
Remote controllers for different components can interfere with
one another. It is recommended to avoid using remote controls
for different components at the same time.
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu ꢂ
arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected,
another menu will open. If a parameter is selected, a parameter
drop-down menu will open.
The remote control batteries should be replaced as needed.
Refer to page 1-5 for battery installation instructions.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
Arrow
Navigation Function(s)
•
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu ꢂ arrow selects the highlighted menu item, which opens another menu,
opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted parameter setting.
ꢂ
ꢃ
•
•
When no menus are open, pressing the Menu ꢂ arrow opens the MAIN MENU (2-9).
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu ꢃ arrow closes the menu and, in most cases, opens the previous menu.
Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU (2-9) is
closed. When the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.
•
•
When no menus are open, pressing the Menu ꢃ arrow performs no function.
When a parameter drop-down menu (next page) is open, pressing the Menu ꢃ arrow selects the current setting and
closes the drop-down menu.
•
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows scrolls upward (ꢀ) and downward (ꢁ) through the complete
list of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears on the front panel display. All menu items appear on the
on-screen display. A scroll bar appears on the right side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen
display top and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu
item is passed.
ꢀ
ꢁ
Menu Options
Parameter Drop-Down Menus
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu
structure. For instance, selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option
opens the SETUP menu as shown below.
Selecting some menu parameters opens a drop-down menu that
contains a list of available parameter settings. For instance,
selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu CUSTOM NAME parameter
(3-48) opens the drop-down menu shown below, which can be
used to select the ON or OFF setting.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
ꢂ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
ON
OFF
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ꢂ
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Menu Parameters
Selecting a menu parameter opens a drop-down menu or horizontal
bar graph that can be used to select the desired setting.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:
To select the desired setting on a parameter drop-down menu:
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote control
Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to scroll upward and downward
through the complete list of available settings. The current
setting appears beneath the parameter name on the on-screen
and front panel displays.
1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote
control Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to increase and decrease the
setting in designated increments. The current setting appears
at the right of the parameter name on the on-screen and front
panel displays.
2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter
name, press the Menu ꢃ arrow to select the setting and close
the drop-down menu.
2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the
Menu ꢃ arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal
bar graph.
Note:
Horizontal Bar Graphs
Menu item selection instructions differ for certain
menus. These instances are noted throughout this
user guide.
Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph,
which indicates the position at which the current parameter setting
falls within the entire parameter range. The current setting appears
at the right of the parameter name on the on-screen and front
panel displays.
For instance, selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu A/V SYNC DELAY
parameter opens the horizontal bar graph shown below, which can
be used to adjust the amount of audio delay.
OFF, 1 to 60ms
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ꢂ
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu REMOTE STATE parameter (3-51)
controls the remote control command bank indicator that appears
on the on-screen display. When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set
to ON, a command bank indicator appears in the top-right corner
of the on-screen display to indicate the last command bank from
which the SDP-5 received a command. When the REMOTE STATE
parameter is set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears on
the on-screen display.
COMMAND BANK ACTIVATION
Remote control buttons perform different commands depending
on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, or Shift command bank is
activated. The Main Zone command bank does not need to be
activated. It remains activated unless the Zone 2 or Shift command
bank is activated. Pressing and holding the remote control Zone 2
button activates the Zone 2 command bank, and pressing and
holding the remote control Shift button activates the Shift
command bank.
A "Z" appears when a command from the Zone 2 command bank
was received last. An "S" appears when a command from the Shift
command bank was received last. No letter appears when a
command from the Main Zone command bank was received last.
The Zone 2 and Shift buttons themselves do not send commands
to the SDP-5. When pressed and held, these buttons activate the
associated command bank. For instance, pressing the remote
control Off button deactivates the SDP-5. Pressing and holding the
Zone 2 button while pressing the Off button deactivates Zone 2.
And, pressing and holding the Shift button while pressing the Off
button deactivates the Main Zone.
COMMAND MATRIX
The command matrix that begins on the next page describes the
commands remote control buttons perform when each command
bank is active. The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustrations
that also begin on the next page correspond to the numbered
items in the matrix.
To activate the Zone 2 or Shift command bank:
1. Press and hold the remote control Zone 2 button to activate
the Zone 2 command bank or press and hold the Shift button
to activate the Shift command bank.
2. While holding the selected button, press the desired remote
control button to send the associated command to the SDP-5.
The command matrix that begins on the next page describes
the commands remote control buttons perform when each
command bank is active.
3. Release the Zone 2 or Shift button to deactivate the associated
command bank.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
2
1
5
6
Button
Main Zone
Zone 2
Shift
4
Deactivates standby mode
and activates the SDP-5.
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Off
On
On
1
3
Blue
OSD
Stat
FP
Activates standby mode and Deactivates Zone 2.
deactivates the SDP-5.
Deactivates the Main Zone.
Off
2
ꢀ
ꢂMenu ꢃ
Shift
Zone 2
Toggles the FRONT PANEL
DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter between ALWAYS BALANCE parameter (4-6).
OFF and its current setting
(3-52).
Centers the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu ZONE2
Centers the AUDIO
7
8
FP
3
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone BALANCE and FADER
parameters (4-6).
ꢁ
Toggles the ON-SCREEN
DISPLAY menu
BACKGROUND parameter
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS
menu BASS, TREBLE, and
TILT EQ parameters to
Deactivates the trigger
output connector labeled 1
when the connector is
configured for remote
operation (3-54).
Light
Blue
4
between ON and OFF (3-51). +0.0dB (4-2 and 4-4).
Mute
Toggles the ON-SCREEN
DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter between ALWAYS
OFF and its current setting
(3-49).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Activates the trigger output
connector labeled 1 when
the connector configured for
remote operation (3-54).
OSD
5
DVD1
TV
VCR
DVD2
CD
Sat
Aux
Tuner
Displays the Main Zone two- Displays the Zone 2 two-line Toggles between opening
line status for 2 seconds
(2-18).
Stat
6
status for 2 seconds (2-18).
and closing the STATUS
menu for the current input
source (2-18).
ning
Activates an additional bank of commands that control the Main Zone. Refer to the previous
page for more information.
Shift
7
Music
2 CH
TV
7/5
Activates a bank of commands that control Zone 2. Refer to the previous page for more
information.
Zone 2
8
SDP-5
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the
matrix above.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
Button
Main Zone
Zone 2
Shift
Increase (ꢀ) and decrease
(ꢁ) the output level of the
Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Subwoofer
as applied to the activated
listening mode (2-7).
Adjust the AUDIO
Scroll upward (ꢀ) and
downward (ꢁ) through
menu items (2-10).
Off
FP
On
9
ꢀ
ꢁ
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone FADER parameter
forward (ꢀ) and backward
(ꢁ) (4-6).
Blue
OSD
Stat
9
11
9
ꢀ
ꢂMenu ꢃ
Shift
Zone 2
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu ZONE2
BALANCE parameter left
(4-6).
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone BALANCE parameter
left (4-6).
Closes the current menu
(2-10).
10
10
12
ꢃ
ꢁ
Opens the menu structure
and selects the highlighted
menu item (2-10).
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu ZONE2
BALANCE parameter right
(4-6).
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone BALANCE parameter
right (4-6).
11
Light
ꢂ
13
14
15
Mute
Activates the remote control backlight, making remote control buttons more visible in the
dark.
12
Light
Sets Zone 2 volume level to
-15dB (ꢀ) or -30dB (ꢁ).
Sets Main Zone volume level
to -15dB (ꢀ) or -30dB (ꢁ).
Scrolls to the previous (ꢀ)
and the next (ꢁ) available
Main Zone listening mode
(5-3).
DVD1
TV
VCR
13
14
DVD2
CD
Sat
Aux
Tuner
Increases (ꢀ) and decreases
Increases (ꢀ) and decreases
(ꢁ) Main Zone volume level (ꢁ) Zone 2 volume level in
Increases (ꢀ) and decreases
(ꢁ) Main Zone volume level
in 3dB increments.
ning
in 1dB increments.
1dB increments.
Toggles between lowering
Main Zone volume level and
restoring Main Zone volume
to its original level (3-53).
Toggles between fully muting Toggles between fully muting
Music
2 CH
TV
7/5
Mute
15
Zone 2 volume level and
restoring Zone 2 volume to
its original level.
Main Zone volume level and
restoring Main Zone volume
to its original level.
SDP-5
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the
matrix above.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
Button
Main Zone
Zone 2
Shift
Selects the DVD1 input for
the Main Zone.
Selects the DVD1 input for
Zone 2.
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in 0.5dB
increments (4-2).
Off
On
DVD1
16
Blue
FP
OSD
Stat
ꢀ
ꢂMenu ꢃ
Shift
Zone 2
Selects the DVD2 input for
the Main Zone.
Selects the DVD2 input for
Zone 2.
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu TREBLE
parameter in 0.5dB
increments (4-2).
DVD2
Sat
ꢁ
Selects the Sat input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the Sat input for
Zone 2.
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu TILT EQ
parameter in 0.2dB
increments (4-4).
Light
Mute
Selects the VCR input for the Selects the VCR input for
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS
menu LOUDNESS parameter
to ON (4-4).
VCR
TV
Main Zone.
Zone 2.
Selects the TV input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the TV input for
Zone 2.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in 0.5dB
increments (4-2).
DVD1
TV
VCR
DVD2
CD
Sat
16
Aux
Tuner
Selects the CD input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the CD input for
Zone 2.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu TREBLE
parameter in 0.5dB
increments (4-2).
CD
Tuner
Aux
ning
Selects the Tuner input for
the Main Zone.
Selects the Tuner input for
Zone 2.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu TILT EQ
parameter in 0.2dB
increments (4-4).
Music
2 CH
TV
7/5
SDP-5
Selects the Aux input for the Selects the Aux input for
Main Zone. Zone 2.
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS
menu LOUDNESS parameter
to OFF (4-4).
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the
matrix above.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
Button
17
Main Zone
Zone 2
Shift
Selects the LOGIC7 Film
mode family for the current
input source (5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Selects the PANORAMA listening
mode (5-11).
Off
FP
On
Blue
OSD
Stat
Selects the Dolby mode family
for the current input source
(5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Refer to the next page.
Refer to the next page.
Refer to the next page.
ꢀ
ꢂMenu ꢃ
Shift
Zone 2
Selects the dts(-ES) mode
family for the current input
source (5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
ꢁ
Light
Selects the THX mode family
for the current input source
(5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Mute
Selects the LOGIC7 Music
mode family for the current
input source (5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Selects the L7 MUSIC SURR listening
mode (5-5).
Music
TV
DVD1
TV
Selects the LOGIC7 TV mode
family for the current input
source (5-3).
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Selects the MONO LOGIC listening
mode (5-14) for 2-channel input
sources and the 5.1 MONO LOGIC
listening mode (5-20) for 5.1-channel
input sources.
VCR
DVD2
CD
Sat
Aux
Tuner
Toggles between 7- and
5-channel playback. Refer to
page 3-34 for more
information.
Reserved for future
possibilities.
Adjusts the MAIN ADV menu INPUT
SELECT parameter, cycling through
the ANALOG, DIGITAL, and AUTO
settings (3-18).
ning
7/5
18
17
19
18
Music
2 CH
TV
7/5
Toggles between the activated Reserved for future
Toggles the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH
ANLG BYP parameter between ON
and OFF (3-20).
2 CH
19
listening mode and the
2-CHANNEL listening mode
(5-13).
possibilities.
SDP-5
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the
matrix above.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
Shift-DOLBY
UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES
The SDP-5 features two zones of operation, called the Main Zone
and Zone 2. The Main Zone controls audio and video sources in
the primary listening space. Zone 2 controls audio and video
sources in the secondary listening space.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital input source is present activates the DOLBY DIGITAL EX
or DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle
the EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON,
and OFF settings.
The Main Zone and Zone 2 have separate digital audio receivers
and dedicated analog input source selectors that allow for
independent input selection in each zone. For instance, the SDP-5
can play a DVD in the Main Zone and a CD in Zone 2 at the same
time.
Shift-dts
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control dts button while a dts(-ES) input source is
present toggles the ES DECODING parameter, cycling through
the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:
1. The same Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input source can be
selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2 at the same time.
However, different Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input sources
cannot be present in both zones at the same time.
Shift-THX
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
input source is present activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2,
or 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode. Refer to page 5-17 for more
information.
2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multi-
channel audio when all of the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and
Zone 2.
A Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input source must be present in
the Main Zone.
The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set
to DMIX (3-24).
3. The Zone 2 audio output connectors are not available when
the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated in the Main Zone
and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG. However, it is
possible to have a 5.1-channel analog input source present in
the Main Zone and a digital input source present in Zone 2.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
TWO-LINE STATUS
Zone 2 Two-Line Status
The two-line status provides information about the zone from
which the SDP-5 last detected a change in status. The Main Zone
two-line status appears when the SDP-5 detects a Main Zone
change, and the Zone 2 two-line status appears when the SDP-5
detects a Zone 2 change.
The Zone 2 two-line status shown at the right
indicates the current input, input source, and
volume level selected in Zone 2. It appears on
the on-screen and front panel displays when the SDP-5 detects a
Zone 2 change.
DVD1
ZONE2
%!D
VOL
-37dB
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS (3-49) parameter can be
used to control the length of time for which the two-line status
appears on the on-screen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu
POSITION parameter (3-50) can be used to control the position of
the two-line status on the on-screen display.
STATUS MENUS
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote
control Stat button opens the STATUS menu for the current input
source, which contains parameters that provide information about
the current input source and listening mode. STATUS menus are
available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog input
sources.
Note:
When the display device is connected to a component
video output connector and the MAIN ADV menu
COMPONENT OSD parameter (3-23) is set to OFF,
the display device does not show the on-screen
display, including the two-line status.
Unlike most other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened
through the selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control
Shift, Stat command must be performed.
To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input
source:
Main Zone Two-Line Status
1. Press and hold the remote control Shift button.
The Main Zone two-line status shown at the
right indicates the current input, listening
mode, input source, and volume level selected
in the Main Zone. It appears on the on-screen and front panel
displays when the SDP-5 detects a Main Zone change.
DVD1
L7 FILM
%!D
VOL
-37dB
2. While holding the Shift button, press the remote control Stat
button. The first page of the STATUS menu for the current
input source will appear on the on-screen and front panel
displays.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator
appears in the top-right corner of the menu. While the Shift
command bank is activated, press the Stat button to open the
second page. If the STATUS menu does not include a
second page, pressing the Stat button closes the menu. If this
occurs, begin again with step 1.
STATUS menus
2CH STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
%!D STATUS
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
PG1
%!D STATUS
PG2
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
EX ENCODING
dB
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
0
-6
-15
-30
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened,
release the Shift button to deactivate the Shift command bank.
Then, press the remote control Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to scroll
upward and downward through the complete list of
parameters available on the current page. When the Shift
command bank is activated, the Menu arrows cannot be
used to scroll through STATUS menu parameters.
-45
-45
DTS-ES STATUS
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
PG1
DTS-ES STATUS
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE
PG2
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
ESI ENCODING
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
Note:
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
STATUS menu parameters provide information about
the current input source and listening mode. These
parameters cannot be adjusted.
-45
2CH BYPASS STATUS
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
4. Press the Stat button or the Menu ꢃ arrow to close the
STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,
press the Stat button or the Menu ꢃ arrow again to close the
STATUS menu.
All STATUS menus are shown at the right. STATUS menu
descriptions begin on the next page. The table beneath each
description lists the default and possible settings for each
parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page
2-22. STATUS menu level meters are described on page 2-23.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
2CH STATUS
DOLBY D STATUS
•
•
Provides information about 2-channel input sources.
Features L and R level meters (2-23).
•
•
Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources.
Features L, C, R, SL, SR, and SUB level meters (2-23).
Parameter
INPUT
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
The selected input
The activated listening mode
3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
32 to 640kbps
The selected input
INPUT
MODE
The activated listening mode
ANLG, PCM
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
EX ENCODING
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
ON, OFF
48kHz
MATRIX, NONE
-27 to +4dB
SMALL, LARGE
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
dts(-ES) STATUS
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
•
•
Provides information about dts(-ES) input sources.
•
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.
Features L, C, R, SL, SR, SB, and SUB level meters (2-23). The
SB level meter appears when a 6.1-channel input source is
present, or when a 5.1-channel input source is present and the
ES DECODING parameter (5-30) is set to ON.
Parameter
INPUT
Possible Settings
The selected input
5.1a BYPASS
MODE
INPUT TYPE
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
BYPASS
Parameter
INPUT
Possible Settings
The selected input
MODE
The activated listening mode
3/3.1, 3/2.1
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
754.5 to 1509.7kbps
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
16bits, 20bits, 24bits
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
ES ENCODING
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
2CH BYPASS STATUS
DIGITAL STATUS
•
Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources
when the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set
to ON.
•
Provides information about digital input sources for which a
sample rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input
signal.
Parameter
INPUT
Possible Settings
The selected input
2CH BYPASS
Parameter
INPUT
Possible Settings
The selected input
The activated listening mode
---
MODE
MODE
INPUT TYPE
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,
3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, and 1/0. Current settings for dts(-ES) input
sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.
STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
2.0 ENCODING
MATRIX, NONE
Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded
source is not detected. The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect
matrix encoding in non-flagged input sources.
DIALOG OFFSET
-27 to +4dB
Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.
Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below
full-scale (-27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the
incoming signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter
indicates the amount of adjustment the SDP-5 makes to normalize
dialog to -27dBFS.
BIT RATE
32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps
Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit
rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding
process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32
to 640 kbps. Possible settings for dts(-ES) sources range from 754
to 1509.7kbps.
ES ENCODING
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
Indicates whether or not a dts-ES-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel
dts-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,
a 5.1-channel dts-ES source with a surround-encoded back channel
is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard dts
source with no dts-ES encoding is detected.
CENTER MIX LVL
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB
Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used
during the mixing process.
EX ENCODING
ON, OFF
CHANNELS
3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded
source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a
standard 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby
Digital Surround EX-encoding is detected. The SDP-5 cannot
automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-
flagged input sources. Refer to page 5-19 for more information.
Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low
frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter
setting is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two
surround channels, and LFE information is present. LFE information
is sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled
Subwoofer.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
SDP-5
INPUT
WORD LENGTH
16bits, 20bits, 24bits
Indicates the selected input (i.e. DVD1).
Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input
signal.
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, BYP, PCM, ---
STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS
Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter
setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the
MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter (3-20) is set to OFF.
When the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog
audio source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to
ON. When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio
source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown
digital audio source is present.
Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround
left (SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB), and subwoofer
(SUB) channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both
analog and digital input sources. For instance, the level meters
indicate digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is
present.
Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS
menu, depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter
appears when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a
5.1-channel source is present and the ES DECODING parameter
(5-30) is set to ON.
MIX ROOM
SMALL, LARGE
Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the
mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, it is
recommended to set the RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for
THX listening modes.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow, and red
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen
background. Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal
levels, and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level
meters appear in white when the on-screen display is not
configured for a blue-screen background.
MODE
Indicates the activated listening mode (i.e. L7 FILM).
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.
SURR MIX LVL
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB
Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during
the mixing process.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
JBL Synthesis
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
SETUP
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing Input Names (NAME) • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors •
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Zone Settings
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Custom Speaker Setups • THX Speaker Setups • Measuring Speaker Distances •
Calibrating Output Levels
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
On-Screen Display Setup • Front Panel Display Setup
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
Selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option opens the SETUP menu as
shown below. SETUP menu option descriptions begin below and
continue throughout this section.
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
ꢀ
Opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu, which can be used to
configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo
connectors, one 5.1-channel and five stereo connectors, or two
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors. Refer to page 3-45 for
more information.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
DISPLAYS
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ꢀ
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which can be used to customize
the on-screen and front panel displays, restore audio/video
synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name. Refer
to page 3-47 for more information.
INPUTS
SETUP
INPUTS
ꢀ
Prompts the selection of the desired input (i.e. DVD1). Selecting an
input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which can be
used to change input names, assign audio and video input
connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure
advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings. Refer to the next
page for more information.
VOLUME CONTROLS
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
ꢀ
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which can be used to
configure Main Zone and Zone 2 volume levels. Refer to page 3-53
for more information.
SPEAKERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ꢀ
TRIGGER
Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure
the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker
setup, set speaker distances, and calibrate output levels. Refer to
page 3-26 for more information.
SETUP
TRIGGER
ꢀ
Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure
the trigger output connector labeled 1. Refer to page 3-54 for
more information.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
VCR INPUT SETUP
NAME
TUNER INPUT SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
VCR
NONE
NAME
TUNER
NONE
ANALOG-4
+0dB
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
ꢀ
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
ANALOG-2
+0dB
S-VIDEO-4
NONE
+0dB
Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which can be used to lock and
unlock settings in the MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and
SETUP menu branches. Refer to page 3-56 for more information.
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
NONE
NONE
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
L7 FILM
L7 MUSIC
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
INPUT SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
(INPUT)
INPUT SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of
the desired input (i.e. DVD1) as shown below. Selecting an input
opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown at the right,
which can be used to change input names, assign audio and video
input connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure
advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.
DVD2 INPUT SETUP
NAME
TV INPUT SETUP
NAME
AUX INPUT SETUP
NAME
DVD2
TV
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-2
NONE
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
OPTICAL-2
ANALOG-3
+0dB
S-VIDEO-5
NONE
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
OPTICAL-3
NONE
+0dB
+0dB
S-VIDEO-2
2
L7 FILM
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
NONE
L7 TV
5.1 L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
ꢀ DVD1
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM-
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ANLG
DIGITAL
CD
LOCK OPTIONS
TUNER
AUX
SAT INPUT SETUP
NAME
CD INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
All INPUT SETUP menus are shown at the right. The parameters on
the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of
which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side
are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to
input. The INPUT SETUP menus to the right indicate factory-default
parameter settings for each input.
SAT
CD
COAX-3
NONE
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
OPTICAL-1
ANALOG-1
+0dB
S-VIDEO-3
3
+0dB
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
NONE
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
%!D
5.1 L7 TV
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
CHANGING INPUT NAMES (NAME)
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu shown below, which can be used to customize or restore
the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection
button labels.
EDIT INPUT NAME
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT NAME
DVD1 ꢀ EDIT INPUT NAME
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
ꢀ
DVD1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
^
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the Menu
EDIT INPUT NAME
ꢀ arrow to advance to the next character space. Press the
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Menu ꢁ arrow to return to the previous character space. The
cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when
the last character space is passed.
Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu shown above,
which can be used to customize the name of the selected input.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired input name.
To customize the name of the selected input:
5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the
Menu ꢁ arrow to close the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down
menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT
INPUT NAME drop-down menu.
2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu opens, press
the remote control Menu ꢂ and ꢃ arrows to change the
character above the cursor (^).
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
PRESS MENU V TO
DVD1 ꢀ EDIT INPUT NAME ꢀ RESTORE INPUT NAME
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT NAME
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COAX-1
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 FILM
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
%!D
LOCK OPTIONS
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
The custom input name appears on the on-screen and front panel
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear
on the input selection menu that opens when the SETUP menu
INPUTS option is selected. The custom input name appears against
the left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default
input name appears in parentheses against the right margin of the
on-screen display.
To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:
1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the
INPUT NAME menu.
2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control
Menu ꢂ and ꢃ arrows to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT
NAME option.
3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted,
press the Menu ꢀ arrow to select this option. The message
“PRESS MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears on the
on-screen and front panel displays.
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-
default input names correspond to front panel and remote control
input selection button labels.
4. When this message opens, press the Menu ꢀ arrow to restore
the factory-default name of the selected input and close the
message. (Press the Menu ꢁ arrow to close the message
without restoring the factory-default name of the selected
input.)
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ASSIGNING AUDIO & VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DVD1
COAX-1
NONE
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
AUTO
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be
assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, five
composite video, five S-video, or three component video input
connectors. The table below lists the INPUT SETUP menu
parameters that can be used to assign audio and video input
connectors. The ANLG IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust
analog audio input levels for the selected input. These parameters
are highlighted on the INPUT SETUP menu shown above.
Parameter
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
Possible Settings
COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE
ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8),
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
AUTO, -18 to +12dB
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE
COMPONENT 1 to 3, NONE
COMPONENT IN
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ COAX-1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
COAX-2
COAX-3
COAX-4
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
Please note the following:
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE
•
When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the SDP-5
will automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to ANALOG (3-18).
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the DIGITAL IN menu shown above, which can be used to
assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input. The
SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned
to any of its eight digital audio input connectors.
•
A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no
analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next
page for information about assigning an analog audio input
connector.
Note:
The digital audio input connectors are compatible
with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby
Digital, and dts(-ES) sources. The digital audio input
connectors are not compatible with MPEG (MP3)
sources.
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-8
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-7)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀINPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 ANALOG IN
DVD1 ANALOG IN
DVD1 ANALOG IN
ꢀDVD1
ꢀNAME
DVD1 ꢀANALOG-1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
5.1 ANLG (6-8)
NONE
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
5.1 ANLG (3-5)
5.1 ANLG (6-8)
NONE
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
C
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
B
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
A
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
•
The ANALOG IN menu labeled C (above) appears when the
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG (3-46) option
is selected.
ANALOG IN ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), NONE
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANALOG IN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the ANALOG IN menu shown above, which can be used to
assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input. The
SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned
to any of its eight analog audio input connectors.
Please note the following:
•
When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the SDP-5
will automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to DIGITAL (3-18).
The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the
configuration of the analog audio input connectors.
•
An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no
digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous
page for information about assigning a digital audio input
connector.
•
The ANALOG IN menu labeled A (above) appears when the
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option (3-45) is
selected.
•
The ANALOG IN menu labeled B (above) appears when the
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG option (3-45)
is selected.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ AUTO
OFF ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
MANUAL
+0dB
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
A+U0TdOB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
AUTO GAIN
+0.0dB
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
LOCK OPTIONS
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
-45
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
ON, OFF
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu shown above, which can be used to
adjust 2-channel analog audio input levels for the selected input.
Despite attempts at standardization, analog audio sources have a
wide range of levels. To compensate for this, the SDP-5 allows
independent input level adjustment for each of its stereo analog
audio input connectors. Input level adjustment is not available
for either of the 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors.
Provides automatic adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input
levels. When set to ON, the SDP-5 automatically monitors and
optimizes input levels. When the input signal is too high, the SDP-5
quickly decreases input levels to avoid overload. When the input
signal is too low, the SDP-5 slowly increases input levels to maximize
the signal-to-noise ratio and dynamic range.
When the AUTO parameter is set to OFF, the SDP-5 does not
provide automatic adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input
levels. Rather, input levels must be adjusted with the ANLG IN LVL
MANUAL parameter (next page).
Note:
Adjustments made on the ANLG IN LVL menu are
applied to the stereo analog audio input connector
assigned for the selected input. When another stereo
analog audio input connector is assigned, these
adjustments are automatically applied to the new
connector.
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-10
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-9)
-18 to +12dB
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ AUTO
OFF ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
MANUAL
+0dB
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
A+U0TdOB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
AUTO GAIN
+0.0dB
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
LOCK OPTIONS
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
-45
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
MANUAL
-18 to +12dB
AUTO GAIN
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
MANUAL
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO GAIN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Provides manual adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input levels.
When manual adjustments are made, the SDP-5 automatically sets
the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF and deactivates
automatic input level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments
are retained when the AUTO parameter is set to ON.
Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the
selected stereo analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN
LVL menu AUTO parameter is set to ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter
indicates the amount of automatic input level adjustment. When
the AUTO parameter is set to OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter
indicates the amount of manual input level adjustment. (In other
words, the AUTO GAIN parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG
IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter.)
Note:
When the AUTO parameter is set to ON, the SDP-5
will not make adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN
LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.
When the AUTO parameter is set to ON, the AUTO GAIN
parameter continues to indicate the amount of manual input level
adjustment until automatic adjustments have been made.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
VIDEO IN
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ COMPOSITE-1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COAX-1
COMPOSITE-2
COMPOSITE-3
COMPOSITE-4
COMPOSITE-5
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
S-VIDEO-4
S-VIDEO-5
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
COMPONENT IN
LOCK OPTIONS
2-CH
%!D
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
LEVEL METERS
VIDEO IN
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
VIDEO IN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left (L) and front right
(R) channels for the selected input. These level meters are also
included on the STATUS menus, allowing them to indicate input
levels for both analog and digital audio input sources. However,
ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments only affect 2-channel
analog audio input sources.
Opens the VIDEO IN menu shown above, which can be used to
assign a composite or S-video input connector for the selected
input. The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can
be assigned to any of its five composite or five S-video input
connectors.
Please note the following:
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow, and red
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen back-
ground. Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels,
and red indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in
white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-
screen background.
•
•
•
Composite video output connectors are available when a
composite or S-video source is present.
S-video output connectors are available when an S-video
source is present.
Component video output connectors are available when a
component video source is present.
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-12
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-11)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 COMPONENT
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ COMPONENT 1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COAX-1
COMPONENT 2
COMPONENT 3
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
1
LOCK OPTIONS
L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
COMPONENT IN
COMPONENT 1 to 3, NONE
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
COMPONENT IN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the COMPONENT menu shown above, which can be used
to assign a component video input connector for the selected
input. The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can
be assigned to any of its 3 component video input connectors.
Please note the following:
•
•
•
Composite video output connectors are available when a
composite or S-video source is present.
S-video output connectors are available when an S-video
source is present.
Component video output connectors are available when a
component video source is present.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DVD1
COAX-1
NONE
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
DDD
5.1 L7 FILM
dDtTsS-EESS DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
The INPUT SETUP menus include three preferred listening mode
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
CD INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
DVD1
CD
COAX-3
NONE
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, and dts-ES. These
parameters can be used to select a preferred listening mode for
2-channel, Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) input sources. The SDP-5
automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a
new input is selected or a new input source is present.
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
+0dB
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
NONE
L7 MUSIC
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
For example, the preferred listening mode selection parameters on
the DVD1 and CD INPUT SETUP menus are set as shown at the
right.
•
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is present,
the SDP-5 activates the L7 FILM listening mode. If a Dolby
Digital source becomes present, the SDP-5 automatically
activates the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode.
•
If the DVD1 input is selected and a dts(-ES) source is present,
the SDP-5 activates the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode. If the
CD input is selected and a 2-channel source is present, the
SDP-5 automatically activates the L7 MUSIC listening mode.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes (continued from page 3-13)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 2-CH MODE
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COAX-1
NONE
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
S-VIDEO-1
1
COMPONENT IN
LOCK OPTIONS
2-CH
%!D
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example
throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise,
whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
USE LAST
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:
2-CH
•
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate the 2-CHANNEL
listening mode if the remote control 2 CH button was used to
activate the 2-CHANNEL listening mode the last time a
2-channel source was present. Instead, it will activate the
2-channel listening mode (i.e. L7 FILM) that was activated prior
to the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
2-CH
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the 2-CH MODE menu shown above, which can be used to
select a preferred listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The
SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening mode
whenever a new input is selected or a new 2-channel source is
present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the listening
mode that was activated the last time a 2-channel source was
present whenever a new input is selected or a new 2-channel
source is present.
•
•
The SDP-5 will automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening
mode if a dts NEO:6 listening mode was activated the last time
a 2-channel source was present. However, the dts NEO:6
listening modes cannot be selected as the preferred listening
mode for 2-channel sources.
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening
mode unless a 44.1 or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.
The dts NEO:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2 or
96kHz, Dolby Digital, or analog sources.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 %!D MODE
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ 5.1 L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
5.1 L7 TV
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THX
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
%!DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
LOCK OPTIONS
DDD
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
USE LAST
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:
DOLBY D
•
The SDP-5 will automatically activate the 5.1 THX MUSIC
listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time
a Dolby Digital source was present. However, the 5.1 THX
MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred
listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
&&D
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the DOLBY D MODE menu shown above, which can be
used to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input
sources. The SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening
mode whenever a new input is selected or a new Dolby Digital
source is present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the
listening mode that was activated the last time a Dolby Digital
source was present whenever a new input is selected or a new
Dolby Digital source is present.
. . . Selecting Preferred Listening Modes continues on page 3-16
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes (continued from page 3-15)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 DTS-ES MODE
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ DTS-ES L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES THX
DTS-ES
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
USE LAST
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
dDtTsS-EESS DdTtSs-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
When the dts-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:
dts-ES
•
The SDP-5 will automatically activate the dts THX MUSIC
listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time
a dts(-ES) source was present. However, the dts THX MUSIC
listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred listening
mode for dts(-ES) sources.
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
\
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the dts-ES MODE menu shown above, which can be used
to select a preferred listening mode for dts(-ES) input sources. The
SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening mode
whenever a new input is selected or a new dts(-ES) source is
present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the listening
mode that was activated the last time a dts(-ES) source was
present whenever a new input is selected or a new dts(-ES) source
is present.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
CONFIGURING ADVANCED ZONE SETTINGS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
DVD1 MAIN ADV
VCR MAIN ADV
TUNER MAIN ADV
MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
ANALOG
OFF
AUTO
ON
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
ANALOG
OFF
AUTO
ON
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens
the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side
of this menu are identical regardless of which input is selected. The
settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings
differ from input to input. The MAIN ADV menus shown at the
right indicate default parameter settings for each input.
OFF
OFF
OFF
DVD2 MAIN ADV
TV MAIN ADV
AUX MAIN ADV
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-18
SAT MAIN ADV
CD MAIN ADV
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
OFF
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-17)
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
OFF
AUTO
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
INPUT SELECT
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
Note:
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO,
the SDP-5 will not select the assigned analog audio
input connector when a valid digital audio input
source is present. Some DVD and CD players output
digital signals (data) when the player is paused or
stopped or when the player is powered on and the
disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the SDP-5
automatically selects the assigned digital audio input
connector.
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned for the selected Main Zone input. The INPUT
SETUP menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog
audio input connector for the selected input. Refer to pages 3-7
and 3-8 for more information.
When the Shift command bank is activated, the remote control 7/5
button can be used to adjust the INPUT SELECT parameter, cycling
through the DIGITAL, ANALOG, and AUTO settings.
The table shown on the next page describes INPUT SELECT
parameter settings.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings
The table below describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings.
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT
SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when the SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the SELECT parameter to AUTO when both digital
ANALOG IN parameter is set to NONE.
DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.
and analog audio input connectors are
assigned.
•
The SDP-5 sends the assigned digital • The SDP-5 sends the assigned analog
audio input connector to the Main Zone
audio output connectors. The SDP-5
ignores the assigned analog audio input
connector.
audio input connector to the Main Zone • The SDP-5 toggles between sending the
audio output connectors. The SDP-5
ignores the assigned digital audio input
connector.
assigned digital and analog audio input
connectors to the Main Zone audio output
connectors based on the input source that
is present. For example:
•
The digital audio input connectors are • The ANALOG IN parameter (3-8) can be
compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2,
and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES)
sources. If an incompatible digital audio
source (i.e. MPEG or MP3) is present, the
SDP-5 automatically selects the assigned
analog audio input connector.
used to assign an analog audio input
connector for the selected input.
–
When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital,
or dts(-ES) source is present, the SDP-5
automatically selects the assigned
digital audio input connector.
–
When an SACD source is present, the
SDP-5 automatically selects the
•
The DIGITAL IN parameter (3-7) can be
used to assign a digital audio input
connector for the selected input.
assigned
connector.
analog
audio
input
•
The AUTO setting is recommended for
components that generate both digital
and analog signals, such as DVD/SACD
players.
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-20
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-19)
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
2-CHANLGBAYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
OFF
AUTO
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
2-CH ANLG BYP
ON, OFF
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
2-CH ANLG BYP
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Allows 2-channel analog audio input sources to bypass A/D
conversion and internal processing. When set to ON, the SDP-5
passes analog audio input signals to the corresponding Main Zone
audio output connectors. When a 5.1-channel analog audio source
is present, the SDP-5 passes only (L) and (R) analog audio input
signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front
L/R. When set to OFF, all analog audio input signals are sent
through A/D conversion and internal processing before passing to
the Main Zone audio output connectors.
Note:
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing
the remote control 2 CH button toggles the 2-CH
ANLG BYP parameter setting ON and OFF.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
AUTO
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
OFF
AUTO
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
S-VIDEO 16:9
AUTO, OFF
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO 16:9
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some
video sources. When set to AUTO, the SDP-5 allows anamorphic
video input signals to pass through the S-video switcher, enabling
compatible display devices to automatically switch between
anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes. When set to OFF,
the SDP-5 prevents anamorphic video input signals from passing
through the S-video switcher, preventing compatible display
devices from automatically switching between anamorphic and
non-anamorphic display modes.
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-22
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-21)
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
OFF
AUTO
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON, OFF
Note:
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched
across the display device screen when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to an S-video output connector. When set to
ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect
ratio* regardless of the incoming signal. When set to OFF, the
display device shows the on-screen display in the same aspect ratio
as the input signal.
•
•
•
The S-VIDEO OSD (4:3) parameter is set to OFF.
An anamorphic video input signal is present.
A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected
to an S-video output connector.
*
Aspect ratio refers to the size of the picture on the display device
screen or to the size of the display device screen. A 4:3 aspect ratio
is almost square. A 16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as
“widescreen,” is almost twice as wide as high.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
OFF
AUTO
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
COMPONENT OSD
ON, OFF
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
COMPONENT OSD
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to the component video output connector.
When set to ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as
a 480i video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize
viewing distractions, the two-line status does not appear on the
on-screen display. When set to OFF, the display device does not
show the on-screen display, including the two-line status (2-18).
Note:
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND
parameter (3-51) is set to OFF, the display device
using the component video output connector will not
show the on-screen display.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ZONE2 IN
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the selected Zone 2 input.The INPUT SETUP menu can
be used to assign one digital and one analog audio input connector for the selected input. Refer to pages 3-7 and 3-8 for more information.
The table shown on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.
DIGITAL
ANLG
DMIX
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
ꢀ DVD1
ꢀ NAME
DVD1 ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
LOCK OPTIONS
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.
When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL or ANLG,
CAUTION
the SDP-5 recognizes some dts-encoded input sources as
audio signals (not data signals) and outputs loud digital noise
from the Zone 2 audio output connectors.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ZONE2 IN Parameter Settings
The table below describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.
DIGITAL
ANLG (Analog)
DMIX (Downmix)
The SDP-5 automatically sets the The SDP-5 automatically sets the Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed version of
ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. Downmixes
when the ANALOG IN parameter when the DIGITAL IN parameter can be generated for Dolby Digital and dts(-ES) sources.
is set to NONE.
is set to NONE.
•
To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in the
Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio output
connectors will mute.
•
The SDP-5 sends the • The SDP-5 sends the
assigned digital audio input
connector to the Zone 2
audio output connectors.
The SDP-5 ignores the
assigned analog audio input
connector.
assigned analog audio input
connector to the Zone 2
audio output connectors.
The SDP-5 ignores the
assigned digital audio input
connector.
•
Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio
output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening mode
is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output connectors
will generate mono output signals.
•
Downmixes cannot be generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening
mode is activated in the Main Zone. However, when the ZONE2 IN
parameter is set to DMIX, the signals from the Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Front L/R are sent to Zone 2. Signals
from other Main Zone audio output connectors are ignored.
•
•
Independent zone monitoring • Independent zone monitoring
is available. is available.
The DIGITAL IN parameter • The ANALOG IN parameter
(3-7) can be used to assign a
digital audio input connector
for the selected input.
(3-8) can be used to assign
an analog audio input
connector for the selected
input.
•
•
Independent zone monitoring is NOT available.
It is recommended to set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX when
recording from a DVD player without built-in Dolby Digital or
®
®
dts-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (i.e. Tivo or Replay TV ).
•
The SDP-5 automatically uses LOGIC7 encoding to downmix
multi-channel input sources (except 5.1-channel analog sources) to
LOGIC7-encoded stereo output signals for listening and recording.
LOGIC7-encoded downmixes are compatible with matrix decoders,
but will sound best when played back through a LOGIC7 listening
mode.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
SPEAKER SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu SPEAKERS option opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to configure the Main Zone
audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup, set speaker distances, and calibrate output levels. The SDP-5 has eight Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
ꢀ FRONT L/R
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
within a 30 to 120Hz range. With the exception of THX 80Hz, all
crossover points activate a 24dB-per-octave filter. The graphs on
the next page indicate the frequency response of these crossover
points.
CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens
the CUSTOM SETUP menu shown above, which can be used to
configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a custom
speaker setup. The CUSTOM SETUP menu allows the selection of
independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output
connector. Refer to the the paragraph below for more information
about determining crossover points.
The THX 80Hz crossover point activates a 12dB-per-octave filter for
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center,
Side L/R, and Rear L/R, and a 24dB-per-octave filter for the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.
For each Main Zone audio output connector, select the crossover
point closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated speaker.
For the output connector labeled Subwoofer, select the crossover
point equal to the lowest crossover point of the other speakers.
Determining Crossover Points
The CUSTOM SETUP menu shown above can be used to assign
independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output
connector. Crossover points can be selected in 10Hz increments
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points.
Low-frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low-
frequency signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.
Highpass Filter
Lowpass Filter
dB
0
0
-12
-24
-36
-48
0
0
-60
10
20
50
100
Hz
200
500
1k
Highpass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30 to 120Hz. The graph above does not
show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.
Lowpass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30 to 120Hz.
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-28
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-27)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ FULL
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
FRONT L/R
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
Parameter
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
FRONT L/R
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
80Hz
80Hz
Opens the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Front L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated
speakers.
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,
NONE
SIDE L/R
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,
NONE
REAR L/R
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,
NONE
SUBWOOFER
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,
NONE
THX ULTRA2 SUB
OFF
ON, OFF
BGC
ASA
N/A
ON, OFF
APART
TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
CENTER SPEAKER
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ FULL
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
CENTER
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
Note:
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
CENTER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the CENTER parameter is set to NONE, center
channel signals will not be redirected if the 5.1a
BYPASS listening mode is activated. To redirect center
channel signals, configure the speaker setup with the
associated DVD-A/SACD player.
Opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu shown above, which can be
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Center. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a full-
range audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the SDP-5
activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the
setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated
speaker. When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects center channel
signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled
Front L/R.
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-30
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-29)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ FULL
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
SIDE L/R
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
Note:
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SIDE L/R
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby
Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX ,
and dts-ES decoding are not available.
Opens the SIDE L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Side L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated
speakers.
When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects side channel signals to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R. If the
CUSTOM SETUP menu REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the
SDP-5 redirects surround channel signals to the Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Front L/R.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
REAR L/R SPEAKERS
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ FULL
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
REAR L/R
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
Note:
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
REAR L/R
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE:
Opens the REAR L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Rear L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated
speakers.
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX
Surround EX, and dts-ES decoding are not
available.
•
The ASA parameter is not available.
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-32
When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects rear channel signals to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L/R. If the
CUSTOM SETUP menu SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the
SDP-5 redirects surround channel signals to the Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Front L/R.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-31)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SUBWOOFER
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ FULL
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
SUBWOOFER
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SUBWOOFER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the SUBWOOFER menu shown above, which can be used to
select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a full-range
audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the SDP-5
activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the
setting equal to the lowest setting of the other speakers.
Note:
When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE,
subwoofer signals will not be redirected if the 5.1a
BYPASS listening mode is activated. To redirect
subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with
the associated DVD-A/SACD player.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
The BGC parameter is not
available when the THX
ULTRA2 SUB parameter is
set to OFF.
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
R
SR
RR
The THX ULTRA2 SUB and BGC parameters are available
on the CUSTOM and SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menus.When
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
a parameter setting is adjusted on one menu, it is
automatically adjusted on the other menu as well.
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
THX ULTRA2 SUB
ON, OFF
BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)
ON, OFF
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
BGC
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
or
or
THX ULTRA2 SUB
Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to
ON. When the BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter
is applied to all Main Zone listening modes and audio output
connectors. When set to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone
listening modes and audio output connectors. When the
parameter setting is N/A, the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to
OFF and boundary gain compensation cannot be adjusted.
Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2
certified. Select the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2
certified and the OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not
Ultra2 certified. When set to ON, the CUSTOM and SYNTHESIS
7CH SETUP menu BGC parameter (next column) can be used to
adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the BGC
parameter is not available (N/A).
Note:
BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is
caused by the proximity of the speakers to the
listening room walls.
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-34
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-33)
TOGETHER
CLOSE
APART
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
ꢀ FRONT L/R
80Hz ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
The ASA parameter is not
available unless the 5.1
THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX
MUSIC, dts THX ULTRA2,
or dts THX MUSIC listening
mode is activated.
R
SR
RR
The ASA parameter is available on the CUSTOM and
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menus. When the parameter
setting is adjusted on one menu, it is automatically
adjusted on the other menu as well.
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART
Note:
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
ASA
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
or
ASA processing is only available when both side and
rear speakers are present.
A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the
rear speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2
listening modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing,
it is recommended to configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which
the rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the
listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the
5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, dts THX ULTRA2, or dts THX
MUSIC listening mode is activated.
When the remote control 7/5 button is used to
toggle between 7- and 5-channel playback:
•
ASA processing is not available during 5-channel
playback.
•
The SDP-5 automatically switches between the
5.1 THX ULTRA2 and 5.1 THX or dts THX
ULTRA2 and dts THX listening modes.
Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear
speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the
distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m),
but less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance
between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ FRONT L/R*
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE V
BUTTON WILL
80Hz
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER*
SIDE L/R*
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER*
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS
R
SR
80Hz
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
7CH SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
N/A
C
L
ASA
APART
When a THX speaker setup is selected, all CUSTOM
SETUP menu parameters are automatically set to 80Hz.
M
SUB
*
These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
However,
a custom speaker setup can still be
configured with the CUSTOM SETUP menu.
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
Note:
•
SYNTHESIS 7-CHANNEL SPEAKER SETUPS
A JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup includes
THX-certified loudspeakers. Use the CUSTOM
SETUP menu to configure a custom speaker setup
for systems that do not include THX-certified
loudspeakers.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the SPEAKER SETUP menu SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP option is
selected, the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP message shown above
appears on the on-screen and front panel displays. When this
message appears, press the remote control ꢀ arrow to open the
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu and configure the Main Zone audio
output connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup or
press the ꢁ arrow to close the message without configuring the
Main Zone audio output connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-channel
speaker setup.
•
A JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup is not
required to activate THX listening modes.
Default
Setting
Possible
Setting(s)
Parameter
FRONT L/R*
CENTER*
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
When the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu opens, the Main Zone
audio output connectors are configured for a JBL Synthesis
7-channel speaker setup. The SDP-5 ignores all CUSTOM SETUP
menu parameter settings and applies an 80Hz crossover point with
24dB per-octave filter to all output connectors. This configuration
is applied to all inputs and listening modes.
SIDE L/R*
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz, NONE
80Hz
SUBWOOFER*
THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF
ON, OFF
BGC
ASA
N/A
ON, OFF
APART
TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART
*
These parameters cannot be adjusted.
. . . Synthesis 7-Channel Speaker Setups continues on page 3-36
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
JBL Synthesis 7-Channel Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-35)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
REAR SPEAKERS
NONE
ꢀ
ꢀ FRONT L/R*
80Hz ꢀ 80Hz
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE V
BUTTON WILL
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER*
SIDE L/R*
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER*
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS
R
SR
80Hz
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
7CH SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
C
L
ASA
M
SUB
*
These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
REAR L/R
THX 80Hz, NONE
The SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB, BGC, and ASA
parameters are identical to the CUSTOM SETUP menu THX
ULTRA2 SUB, BGC, and ASA parameters. When one of these
parameter settings is adjusted on one menu, it is automatically
adjusted on the other menu at the same time. Refer to pages 3-33
and 3-34 for these parameter descriptions.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
REAR L/R
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the REAR SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be used
to activate and deactivate the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Rear L/R. When set to 80Hz, the SDP-5 activates
these connectors and configures all Main Zone audio output
connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-Channel speaker setup. When set
to NONE, the SDP-5 deactivates these connectors and configures
the other Main Zone audio output connectors for a JBL Synthesis
5-Channel speaker setup.
Note:
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE:
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX
Surround EX, and dts-ES decoding are not
available.
•
The ASA parameter is not available.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
0.0 to 30.0ft
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
ꢀ FRONT LEFT 0.0ft ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CENTER
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
MEASURING SPEAKER DISTANCES
Note:
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the system includes a calibrated JBL Digital
Equalizer, speaker distance parameters should
remain at their factory-default settings (0.0ft). The
digital equalizer will perform arrival time correction.
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option
opens the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above, which can be
used to set the distance between the listening position and the
speakers connected to the Main Zone audio output connectors.
The SDP-5 features a speaker distance control that allows distances
to be entered for each speaker. This helps ensure accurate signal
arrival time at the listening position, but is not a substitute for
proper speaker placement.
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m
FEET, METERS
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
To determine the appropriate setting for each speaker, measure the
distance between the listening position and the front baffle of the
speaker. Then, set the corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu
parameter to the closest available setting.
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
. . . Measuring Speaker Distances continues on page 3-38
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Measuring Speaker Distances (continued from page 3-37)
FEET
METERS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
ꢀ FRONT LEFT 0.0ft ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
FRONT LEFT & RIGHT
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m
REAR LEFT & RIGHT
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT OR FRONT RIGHT
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
REAR LEFT OR REAR RIGHT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R.
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R.
CENTER
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m
SUBWOOFER
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
CENTER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
SUBWOOFER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the speaker distance for the speaker connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Center.
Sets the speaker distance for the subwoofer connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.
SIDE LEFT & RIGHT
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m
UNITS
FEET, METERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
SIDE LEFT OR SIDE RIGHT
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
UNITS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L/R.
Defines the unit of measurement in which the SDP-5 measures
speaker distances. When set to FEET, the SDP-5 measures speaker
distances in feet. When set to METERS, the SDP-5 measures speaker
distances in meters. When the UNITS parameter setting is toggled,
the SDP-5 converts the current speaker distance to the closest
available value in the selected unit of measurement.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ INTERNAL NOISE TEST
INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
ꢀ
ꢀ FRONT LEFT
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
+0.0dB
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
CENTER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
SUBWOOFER
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
•
•
Before output level calibration begins, remove objects
(as well as people) that obstruct the line-of-sight path between
the SPL meter and the speaker being measured.
CALIBRATING OUTPUT LEVELS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option
opens the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown above, which can be
used to calibrate output levels for the Main Zone audio output
connectors. Calibration ensures that output levels correspond to
THX reference levels (75dB) for input sources such as DVDs.
Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening
position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate spot where
the listener’s head will be during listening.
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Please note the following to ensure accurate output level
calibration:
Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown above, which
indicates that the internal noise test produces loud calibration
test signals. When this message appears, press the Menu ꢀ arrow
to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown above and con-
duct the internal noise test or press the Menu ꢁ arrow to close the
message without conducting the internal noise test. When the
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test
automatically begins.
•
•
It is recommended to use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter
to calibrate output levels. An SPL meter is a device that
measures the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure
accurate output level calibration. SPL meters are available at
Radio Shack (catalog number 33-2050).
Before output level calibration begins, eliminate extraneous
noises in the listening space, such as conversations, air
conditioners, and sounds that filter in through open doors and
windows.
. . . Internal Noise Test continues on page 3-40
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
Internal Noise Test (continued from page 3-39)
Note:
Main Zone audio output connectors for which the
corresponding CUSTOM or SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
menu parameter is set to NONE cannot be adjusted
during the internal noise test. These output
connectors can be adjusted during the external noise
test, but there is no need to do so.
Note:
The SDP-5 automatically sets volume level to +0dB
when the internal noise test begins. It is recommended
to avoid adjusting master volume level while the test
is in progress to achieve a 75dB THX reference level
(a 75dB SPL meter reading).
When the internal noise test is conducted, a calibration test signal
travels to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order
listed on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu. As the calibration test
signal travels, the cursor automatically scrolls downward through
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu parameters, highlighting each
speaker parameter as the corresponding output connector is tested.
Each output connector is tested for about 4 seconds.
The SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu can be used to manually adjust
output levels while the internal noise test is conducted. Refer to
page 3-42 for more information.
Please note the following:
•
When the internal noise test is conducted, it is possible to
select a SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu parameter just as the
SDP-5 is about to automatically scroll to the next parameter,
causing the SDP-5 to send the calibration noise to both
speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ INTERNAL NOISE TEST ꢀ FRONT LEFT
DACS CALIBRATION
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
SPEAKERS
DACS CALIBRATION
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CENTER
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
SUBWOOFER
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
When DACS calibration is conducted, the SDP-5 activates a
listening mode based on the Main Zone input source that is
present. The table in the next column indicates the listening mode
that is activated for each input source. When a listening mode is
activated during DACS calibration, it retains its factory-default
settings, ignoring custom settings that might have been selected
on the corresponding listening mode menu. Custom settings will
be restored after DACS calibration is complete.
DACS CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
DACS CALIBRATION
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the DACS CALIBRATION menu shown above, which can be
used to adjust output levels while DACS calibration is conducted.
DACS calibration requires an external calibration source, such as an
audio calibration disc or, in JBL Synthesis systems, the DACS (JBL
Digital Acoustical Calibration System). An audio calibration disc can
be used with the DACS.
®
2-Channel
Sources
Dolby Digital
Sources
dts(-ES)
Sources
To optimize systems that include DACS and a JBL Digital
Equalizer:
DOLBY PLII MOVIE
DOLBY DIGITAL*
dts(-ES)*
1. Connect the DACS Signal Generator left and right output
connectors labeled EVP-1 to the SDP-5 analog audio input
connectors labeled 1. These connectors are active in the TAPE
input.
*
These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker
configuration, and certain parameter settings.
2. Set the master volume level to 0dB.
This will provide the correct signal path and reference output level.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
3. When the desired parameter is highlighted, press the ꢀ arrow
to select this parameter. A horizontal bar graph will open on
the on-screen and front panel displays.
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST & DACS CALIBRATION Menus
Conducting the internal noise test opens the SPEAKER LEVEL
ADJUST menu shown on page 3-39. Conducting DACS calibration
opens the DACS CALIBRATION menu shown on the previous page.
Both menus can be used to adjust output levels for the Main Zone
audio output connectors.
4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, follow the instructions
on page 2-11 to adjust the selected parameter. When the SPL
meter is set to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response, output
levels should be adjusted to achieve a 75dB SPL meter reading
from the primary listening position. When the SPL meter is not
set to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response, output levels
should be adjusted to achieve the appropriate SPL meter
reading from the primary listening position.
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
5. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the ꢁ
arrow to close the horizontal bar graph and return to the
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST or DACS CALIBRATION menu. When
the internal noise test is conducted, the internal noise test will
continue, and automatic scrolling will resume.
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
FRONT LEFT & RIGHT
-18.0 to +12.0dB
SUBWOOFER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
(TEST) FRONT LEFT OR FRONT RIGHT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R.
To manually adjust output levels while the internal noise test or
DACS calibration is conducted:
1. When the internal noise test is conducted, set the SPL meter to
“C” weighting and “SLOW” response. When DACS calibration
is conducted, set the SPL meter according to the DACS
Installers Manual or audio calibration disc instructions. If no
setting is specified, set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and
“SLOW” response.
CENTER
-18.0 to +12.0dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
(TEST)
CENTER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the output level for the speaker connected to the Main Zone
audio output connector labeled Center.
2. Press the remote control ꢂ and ꢃ arrows to highlight the
desired SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST or DACS CALIBRATION menu
parameter.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
SIDE LEFT & RIGHT
-18.0 to +12.0dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
(TEST)
SIDE LEFT OR SIDE RIGHT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Side L/R.
REAR LEFT & RIGHT
-18.0 to +12.0dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
(TEST)
REAR LEFT OR REAR RIGHT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R.
SUBWOOFER
-18.0 to +12.0dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
(TEST)
SUBWOOFER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the output level for the subwoofer connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ INTERNAL NOISE TEST ꢀ CAL NOISE
BASS PEAK LIMITER
ON ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SUB LIMITER
OFF
100dB
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SUB LIMIT ADJ
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
BASS PEAK LIMITER
CAL NOISE
ON, OFF
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
CAL NOISE
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the BASS PEAK LIMITER menu shown above, which can
be used to set amplitude limits for all speakers to which low
frequencies are redirected, including the subwoofer.
Determines whether the bass peak limiter is set with an internal or
external source. When set to ON, the SDP-5 activates an
internal calibration noise signal to set the limiter. When set to OFF,
the SDP-5 deactivates the internal calibration noise test signal. An
external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc is
required to generate a noise signal to set the bass peak limiter.
The SDP-5 is equipped with an internal limiter that prevents low-
frequency output signals from exceeding a designated level. This is
essential for Dolby Digital and dts(-ES) input sources that produce
low-frequency peaks at much higher levels than 2-channel sources.
In home theaters, the subwoofer and its associated amplifier might
not be able to reproduce these levels without overloading.
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
CAL NOISE
ON
ON, OFF
SUB LIMITER
SUB LIMIT ADJ
OFF
ON, OFF
100dB
75 to 120dB
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ INTERNAL NOISE TEST ꢀ CAL NOISE
BASS PEAK LIMITER
ON ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SUB LIMITER
OFF
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SUB LIMIT ADJ
100dB
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
SUB LIMITER
ON, OFF
SUB LIMIT ADJ
75 to 120dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SUB LIMITER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SUB LIMIT ADJ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Limits output signals for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer, as well as other Main Zone audio output
connectors to which low-frequency signals are redirected. When set
to ON, the SDP-5 restricts output signals to the level specified in
the BASS PEAK LIMITER menu SUB LIMIT ADJ parameter. When set
to OFF, the SDP-5 does not restrict output levels, regardless of the
SUB LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
Specifies the output level restriction placed on the Main Zone
audio output connector labeled Subwoofer, as well as other Main
Zone audio output connectors to which low-frequency signals are
redirected. This restriction is applied when the BASS PEAK LIMITER
menu SUB LIMITER parameter is set to ON. When the SUB LIMIT
ADJ parameter is selected, it is automatically set to 75dB.
75 to 120dB
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
SPEAKER SETUP
ꢀ CUSTOM SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ INTERNAL NOISE TEST ꢀ CAL NOISE
BASS PEAK LIMITER
ON ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
DACS CALIBRATION
SUB LIMITER
OFF
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SUB LIMIT ADJ
100dB
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
REAR PANEL CONFIG
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu REAR PANEL CONFIG option opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu shown below, which can be used to configure
the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel
connectors.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
ꢀ 8 STEREO INPUTS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
OR
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
OR
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
LOCK OPTIONS
8 STEREO INPUTS
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
8 STEREO INPUTS
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Configures the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo
connectors, which is the factory-default configuration.
Configures the analog audio input connectors as one 5.1-channel
and five stereo connectors.
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as
eight stereo connectors:
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as one
5.1-channel and five stereo connectors:
•
•
All connectors are configured as stereo connectors.
•
The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are configured as
stereo connectors.
Neither of the 5.1-channel connectors is available. Sources that
were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled 3, 4, and
5 are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5.
Sources that were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector
labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 6, 7, and 8.
•
The connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are configured as a
5.1-channel connector. This connector is sent to the Main
Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table at the
bottom of the next column.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
6, 7, and 8. The 5.1-channel connectors should only be used
with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG (continued from page 3-45)
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
ꢀ
ꢀ
The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the
Main Zone analog audio output connectors as shown in the
table below.
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as one
5.1-channel and five stereo connectors:
•
Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo
connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to the
5.1-channel connector labeled 6, 7, and 8. The 5.1-channel
connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog
sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.
Input Connector
Output Connector
Front L
(L)
(R)
Front R
(C)
Center
(SUB)
(LS)
(RS)
Subwoofer
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
Side L and Rear L
Side R and Rear R
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
ꢀ
ꢀ
Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo and
two 5.1-channel connectors.
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:
•
The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo
connectors.
•
The connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 are configured as a 5.1-
channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are
configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are
sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in
the table at the bottom of this column.
•
Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo
connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 are reassigned to the
5.1-channel connector labeled 3, 4, and 5. Two-channel
sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6,
7, and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to customize the on-screen and
front panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.
OFF, 1 to 60ms
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
LOCK OPTIONS
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF, 1 to 60ms
Parameter
SETUP
DISPLAYS
A/V SYNC DELAY
ꢀ
ꢀ
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
Refer to page 3-49
Refer to page 3-52
Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as
video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This
parameter can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate
for the video signal delay.
OFF
OFF
N/A
OFF, 1 to 60ms
ON, OFF
N/A
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
LOCK OPTIONS
To customize the name of the SDP-5:
CUSTOM NAME
ON, OFF
1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT
CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.
SETUP
DISPLAYS
CUSTOM NAME
ꢀ
ꢀ
Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when
the SDP-5 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls
across the on-screen and front panel displays when the SDP-5 is
activated. When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear
when the SDP-5 is activated. The custom name can be entered in
the DISPLAY SETUP menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter.
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens,
press the remote control Menu ꢂ and ꢃ arrows to change the
character above the cursor (^).
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the Menu
ꢀ arrow to advance to the next character space. Press the
Menu ꢁ arrow to return to the previous character space. The
cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when
the last character space is passed.
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SETUP
DISPLAYS
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
ꢀ
ꢀ
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.
Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be
used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter
is set to ON, the custom unit name appears on the on-screen and
front panel displays when the SDP-5 is activated.
5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press
the Menu ꢁ arrow to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-
down menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ
SDP-5
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
^
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
LOCK OPTIONS
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
TOP
NTSC
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
OFF
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
ON
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP
STATUS
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
STATUS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu ON-SCREEN DISPLAY option
opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu shown above, which can be
used to customize the on-screen display.
Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main
Zone video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the
on-screen display remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS,
the on-screen display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input
source changes or the SDP-5 receives a command. When set to
ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display remains off at all times. It will
not reappear until the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
STATUS
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
POSITION
TOP
NTSC
ON
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
ON, OFF
Note:
FORMAT
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen
display immediately disappears. Press the remote
control OSD button or use the front panel display as
a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2
SECONDS.
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
ON
ON, OFF
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
TOP
NTSC
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
OFF
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
ON
LOCK OPTIONS
POSITION
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
FORMAT
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
POSITION
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FORMAT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display
device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near
the top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-
line status is centered on the display device screen. When set to
BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the
display device screen. Refer to page 2-18 for more information
about the two-line status.
Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the
video switcher, and the display device. Select the setting that is
compatible with the source components and display device.
Note:
The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and
S-video output connectors. It does not affect the
component video output connector.
SECAM
PAL
NTSC
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
TOP
NTSC
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
OFF
OFF
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
REMOTE STATE
ON
LOCK OPTIONS
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
TOP
NTSC
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
OFF
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
ON
LOCK OPTIONS
BACKGROUND
ON, OFF
REMOTE STATE
ON, OFF
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACKGROUND
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
REMOTE STATE
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,
on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray
background (depending on the display device). When set to OFF,
on-screen display menus appear over the video input signal.
Controls the remote control command bank indicator that appears
on the on-screen display. When set to ON, a command bank
indicator appears in the top-right corner of the on-screen display to
indicate the last command bank from which the SDP-5 received a
command. When set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears
on the on-screen display.
Note:
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the
on-screen display will disappear if the display device
is using the component video output connector.
A "Z" appears when a command from the Zone 2 command bank
was received last. An "S" appears when a command from the Shift
command bank was received last. No letter appears when a com-
mand from the Main Zone command bank was received last.
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
TOP
NTSC
ON
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
OFF
OFF
REMOTE STATE
ON
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
LOCK OPTIONS
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS ALWAYS ON ꢀ
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
BRIGHTNESS
75%
REAR PANEL CONFIG
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
DISPLAYS
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
LOCK OPTIONS
whenever the input source changes or the SDP-5 receives a
command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the front panel display
remains off at all times.
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAYS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ꢀ
ꢀ
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu shown above, which can
be used to customize the front panel display.
Note:
When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF, the front panel
display immediately disappears. Press the remote
control FP button or use the on-screen display as a
guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2
SECONDS.
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
STATUS
ALWAYS ON
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
BRIGHTNESS
75%
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%
BRIGHTNESS
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%
STATUS
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
SETUP
DISPLAYS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
SETUP
DISPLAYS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the brightness of front panel display characters. When a
setting is selected, front panel display illumination automatically
adjusts to the selected brightness.
Activates and deactivates the front panel display. When set to
ALWAYS ON, the front panel display remains on at all times. When
set to 2 SECONDS, the front panel display appears for 2 seconds
100%
75%
50%
25%
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
DISPLAY SETUP
ꢀ ON-SCREEN DISPLAY ꢀ STATUS ALWAYS ON ꢀ
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
FRONT DISPLAY
AI
BRIGHTNESS
SPEAKERS
75%
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
LOCK OPTIONS
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu VOLUME CONTROLS option opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to
configure Main Zone and Zone 2 volume levels.
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
ꢀ MAIN PWR ON
ꢀ
-30dB ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
-30dB
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE
SPEAKERS
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE
B
-30dB
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
ZONE PWR ON
-30dB
ZONE PWR ON
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
MUTE LEVEL
FULL MUTE, -40dB, -30dB, -20dB, -10dB
Parameter
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
MUTE LEVEL
ꢀ
ꢀ
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
-30dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone
whenever the front panel or remote control Mute button is
pressed. When set to FULL MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be
fully attenuated whenever the front panel or remote control Mute
button is pressed. Otherwise, Main Zone volume level will be
attenuated to the selected level.
FULL MUTE FULL MUTE, -40dB, -30dB, -20dB,
-10dB
ZONE PWR ON
-30dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
MAIN PWR ON
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
MAIN PWR ON
ꢀ
ꢀ
ZONE PWR ON
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the
Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone will
activate at the last volume level that was selected in that zone
during the previous operating session.
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
ZONE PWR ON
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever
Zone 2 is activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 will activate at
the last volume level that was selected in that zone during the
previous operating session.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
TRIGGER SETUP
ꢀ REMOTE ONLY
TRIGGER SETUP
OFF ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD1
OFF
OFF
SETUP
TRIGGER
ꢀ
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
L7 FILM
* TRIGGER SETUP menu
listening mode names
are fixed, meaning
these names do not
change when certain
encoding is present.
For instance, the 5.1
THX SurEX listening
mode label appears
whether THX Ultra2,
THX Surround EX,
or no encoding is
engaged.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the
TRIGGER SETUP menu shown at the right, which can
be used to configure the trigger output connector
labeled 1. The SDP-5 rear panel houses two 12V DC
trigger output connectors. The connector labeled
PWR – the power trigger output connector – is not configurable. It is activated when the
SDP-5 is activated, and deactivated when the SDP-5 is deactivated. The trigger output
connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or program operation.
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
dts neo:6 FILM
dts neo:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
REMOTE ONLY
Program Operation
All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY
parameter – are considered program operation parameters.
OFF
N/A
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
REMOTE ONLY
ON, OFF
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
SETUP
TRIGGER
REMOTE ONLY
ꢀ
ꢀ
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THXI SurEX
5.1 THXI MUSIC
%! DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
DTS-ES L7 FILM
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES THX
DTS THXI MUSIC
DTS-ES
Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote operation. When set to ON, this
connector is configured for remote operation. When the Zone 2 command bank is activated, it
can be activated and deactivated with the remote control Mode ꢂ and ꢃ buttons (2-14). The
SDP-5 ignores all other TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF, the trigger
output connector labeled 1 is not configured for remote operation. It can be configured for
program operation. Refer to the next page for more information about configuring the trigger
output connector labeled 1 for program operation.
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
TRIGGER SETUP
ꢀ REMOTE ONLY
Program Operation Parameters
ON, OFF
OFF ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
DVD1
OFF
OFF
SETUP
TRIGGER
(PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)
ꢀ
ꢀ
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
L7 FILM
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
* TRIGGER SETUP menu
listening mode names
are fixed, meaning
these names do not
change when certain
encoding is present.
For instance, the 5.1
THX SurEX listening
mode label appears
whether THX Ultra2,
THX Surround EX,
or no encoding is
engaged.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF
Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for
program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu
parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY parameter –
are considered program operation parameters. The
connector can be associated with multiple inputs and
listening modes at the same time.
ON
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and program operation parameters are set to
ON, the trigger output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corresponding Main Zone
input, Main Zone listening modes, or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated with
individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When
configured for program operation, the connector is activated when the corresponding inputs
and listening modes are selected and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and listening
modes are deselected.
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF
%!PRO LOGIC
R
ddtssnneeoo:66 FFIILMM
R
dts neo:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
PANORAMA
ON
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
ON
OFF
ON
OOFNF
Note:
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory-
default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP
menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.
ON
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THXI SurEX
5.1 THXI MUSIC
%!DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OOFNF
ON
DTS-ES L7 FILM
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
ON
ON
DTS-ES THX MUSIC ON
DTS THXMUSIC
DTS-ES
OOFNF
ON
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
OFF
ON
OFF
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
SDP-5
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
ꢀ
Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu shown below, which can be used to lock and unlock
settings in the MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP menu branches.
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
MAIN MENU
SETUP
ꢀ INPUTS
LOCK OPTIONS
ꢀ MODES UNLOCKED ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
SETUP
UNLOCKED
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
AUDIO CNTRL
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
Parameter
MODES
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
AUDIO CNTRL
ꢀ
ꢀ
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to
LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to
UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.
AUDIO CNTRL
SETUP
MODES
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
SETUP
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
MODES
ꢀ
ꢀ
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which include all
listening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings
cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be
adjusted.
Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these
settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these
settings can be adjusted.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP
JBL Synthesis
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO CONTROLS
JBL Synthesis
AUDIO CONTROLS
Selecting the MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS option opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu shown below, which can be used to customize the
Main Zone audio output connectors and control the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS,
BALANCE, and FADER parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors. These parameter settings affect all inputs and listening modes
selected in the Main Zone, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance
of the Zone 2 audio output connectors. This parameter setting affects all inputs selected in Zone 2.
-6.0 to +6.0dB
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
ꢀ BASS
+0.0dB ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
<|>
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
Default
Value
Possible
Settings
BASS
-6.0 to +6.0dB
Parameter
BASS
AUDIO CONTROLS
BASS
ꢀ
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
-6.0 to +6.0dB
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and
Subwoofer. The graph shown on the left of the next page illustrates
the frequency response of BASS parameter settings.
TREBLE
-6.0 to +6.0dB
-3.0 to +3.0dB
ON, OFF
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
<|>
L< to <|> to >R
B< to <|> to >F
L< to <|> to >R
<|>
TREBLE
-6.0 to +6.0dB
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
AUDIO CONTROLS
TREBLE
ꢀ
AUDIO CONTROLS menu parameter descriptions begin in the next column.
Controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The graph
shown on the right of the next page illustrates the frequency
response of TREBLE parameter settings.
Note:
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,
pressing the remote control Blue button sets the
BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO CONTROLS
SDP-5
BASS Parameter Settings
TREBLE Parameter Settings
+6.0
+5.5
+5.0
+4.5
+4.0
+3.5
+3.0
+2.5
+2.0
+1.5
+1.0
+0.5
+0.0
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5
-3.0
-3.5
-4.0
-4.5
-5.0
-5.5
-6.0
+6.0
+5.5
+5.0
+4.5
+4.0
+3.5
+3.0
+2.5
+2.0
+1.5
+1.0
+0.5
+0.0
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5
-3.0
-3.5
-4.0
-4.5
-5.0
-5.5
-6.0
+0.0
+0.0
10
20
50
100
200
500
Hz
1k
2k
5k
10k 20k
10
20
50
100
200
500
Hz
1k
2k
5k
10k 20k
The BASS parameter (previous page) controls the amount of low-frequency boost or
cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and
Subwoofer.
The TREBLE parameter (previous page) controls the amount of boost or cut applied to
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.
. . . AUDIO CONTROLS continues on page 4-4
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO CONTROLS
JBL Synthesis
AUDIO CONTROLS (continued from page 4-3)
-3.0 to +3.0dB
ON
OFF
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
ꢀ BASS
+0.0dB ꢀ
ꢀ BASS
+0.0dB ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
OOFNF
<|>
<|>
<|>
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
TILT EQ
-3.0 to +3.0dB
LOUDNESS
ON, OFF
AUDIO CONTROLS
TILT EQ
AUDIO CONTROLS
LOUDNESS
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer.
This parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a
hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting is increased, frequencies higher
than 1kHz are boosted, while frequencies lower than 1kHz are
simultaneously cut. As the setting is decreased, frequencies higher than
1kHz are cut, while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously
boosted. The graph shown on the left of the next page illustrates
the frequency response of TILT EQ parameter settings.
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front
L/R, Center, and Subwoofer. When set to ON, loudness
compensation is automatically applied based on volume level. As
volume level increases, the amount of boost automatically
decreases. The loudness contour is optimized for sources calibrated
to THX reference levels. When set to OFF, no loudness
compensation is applied. The graph shown on the right of the next
page illustrates the frequency response that is automatically
applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main
Zone volume level is adjusted.
Note:
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,
pressing the remote control Blue button sets the
BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO CONTROLS
SDP-5
TILT EQ Parameter Settings
LOUDNESS Parameter Settings
+3.0
+2.8
+2.6
+2.4
+2.2
+2.0
+1.8
+1.6
+1.4
+1.2
+1.0
+0.8
+0.6
+0.4
+0.2
-0.0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1.0
-1.2
-1.4
-1.6
-1.8
-2.0
-2.2
-2.4
-2.6
-2.8
-3.0
+3.0
+2.8
+2.6
+2.4
+2.2
+2.0
+1.8
+1.6
+1.4
+1.2
+1.0
+0.8
+0.6
+0.4
+0.2
+0.0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1.0
-1.2
-1.4
-1.6
-1.8
-2.0
-2.2
-2.4
-2.6
-2.8
-3.0
dB
0
0
+12
0
0
+9
0
0
+6
0
0
+3
0
0
10
20
50
100
200
500
Hz
1k
2k
5k
10k
20k
10
20
50
100
200
500
Hz
1k
2k
5k
10k 20k
The TILT EQ parameter (previous page) controls the amount of tilt equalization
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and
Subwoofer.
The LOUDNESS parameter (previous page) controls the amount of low-frequency
boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled
Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer.
. . . AUDIO CONTROLS continues on page 4-6
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO CONTROLS
JBL Synthesis
AUDIO CONTROLS (continued from page 4-5)
L<
<|>
>R
B<
<|>
>F
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
ꢀ BASS
ꢀ
ꢀ BASS
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
<|>
<|>
<|>
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
ZONE2 BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
AUDIO CONTROLS
BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS
ZONE2 BALANCE
ꢀ
ꢀ
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors.
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output
connectors.
FADER
B< to <|> to >F
Note:
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,
pressing the remote control FP button centers the
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter.
AUDIO CONTROLS
FADER
ꢀ
Controls the back-to-front balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors.
Note:
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing
the remote control FP button centers the Main Zone
BALANCE and FADER parameters.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Listening Mode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode ꢀ and ꢁ Buttons • Mode
Family Selection Buttons
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
L7 FILM • L7 TV • L7 MUSIC • L7 MUSIC SURR • DOLBY PLII + THX • DOLBY PLII
MOVIE • DOLBY PLII MUSIC • DOLBY PRO LOGIC • dts NEO:6 FILM • dts NEO:6
MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB • CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL • PANORAMA •
PANORAMA CALIBRATION • PARTY • 2-CHANNEL • MONO LOGIC • MONO
SURROUND • MONO • 5.1 L7 FILM • 5.1 L7 TV • 5.1 L7 MUSIC • 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX
ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX • 5.1 THX MUSIC • DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX
• 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC • 5.1 MONO SURR • 5.1 MONO • dts-ES
DECODING • dts(-ES) L7 FILM • dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC • dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX
• dts THX Music • dts(-ES) • dts(-ES) 2-CHAN • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
ꢂL7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
Selecting the MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu shown at
the left, which can be used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE
ADJUST menu opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
dts neo:6 FILM
dts neo:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode for the current Main
Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening
mode menu, which can be used to customize the activated listening mode. These adjustments
are applied when that listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in the
Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THXI*
5.1 THXI MUSIC
%!DIGITAL*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION
Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog input sources.
The SDP-5 allows listening mode selection for all Main Zone sources. In some cases, the
SDP-5 automatically activates a listening mode in response to certain commands. For this
reason, it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode
activation occurs.
Listening modes can be activated with:
DTS-ES L7 FILM*
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC*
DTS-ES THX *
DTS THXI MUSIC
DTS-ES*
DTS-ES 2-CHAN*
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
•
•
•
the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters (3-13)
the front panel or remote control Mode ꢀ and ꢁ buttons (2-3, 2-14)
the remote control mode family selection buttons (2-16)
* These listening mode names differ depending on
the input source, the speaker configuration, and
certain parameter settings. Refer to the Listening
Mode Descriptions section that begins on the next
page for more information.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION
PARAMETERS
Button
Button
2-Channel
Sources
Dolby Digital
Sources
dts(-ES)
Sources
The INPUT SETUP menus include three preferred listening mode
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, and dts-ES. These
parameters can be used to select a preferred listening mode for
2-channel, Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) input sources. The SDP-5
automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a
new input is selected or a new input source is present. Refer to
page 3-13 for more information.
L7 FILM
DOLBY PLII MOVIE
dts NEO:6 FILM
DOLBY PLII + THX
L7 MUSIC
5.1 L7 FILM
dts(-ES) L7 FILM
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
DOLBY DIGITAL*
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
dts(-ES)
dts-ES THX
5.1 THX*
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 L7 TV
MODE ꢀ AND ꢁ BUTTONS
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC
Music
TV
The front panel and remote control Mode ꢀ and ꢁ buttons can
be used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone
input source. Pressing these buttons scrolls upward (ꢀ) and
downward (ꢁ) through listening modes available for the current
Main Zone source. Listening modes are scrolled in the order that
appears on the MODE ADJUST menu (5-2).
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
L7 TV
*
These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker
configuration, and certain parameter settings.
** The "MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE" message appears on the on-screen and
front panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input
source that is present.
For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, the Mode ꢀ
and ꢁbuttons scroll through available 2-channel listening modes.
The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of
the Main Zone two-line status (2-20).
LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS
Listening mode descriptions begin on the next page. The table
beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for
each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus
are shown in the Appendix, beginning on page A-10. Listening
mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page
5-28.
MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS
The remote control mode family selection buttons can be used to
activate the LOGIC7 Film, Dolby, dts(-ES), THX, LOGIC7 Music, or
LOGIC7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone
input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a
2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is
activated. The table at the top of the next column indicates the
listening modes associated with each mode family selection
button.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
L7 FILM
L7 TV
MODE ADJUST
L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
L7 TV
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-
encoded film sources.
Based on the L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically
tailored for broadcast sources.
•
Derives seven channels from 2-channel input sources, as well as
full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically
increase the perceived width, length, and sense of envelopment
of the listening space.
•
•
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded
broadcast sources.
Recommended for 2-channel broadcast sources.
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Recommended for 2-channel film sources.
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
+0.0dB
FILM
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
ON, OFF
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
REAR
OFF
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
ON, OFF
+0.0dB
ON
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
REAR
OFF
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
ON, OFF
15.3kHz
15ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OFF
ON, OFF
15.3kHz
15ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
MODE ADJUST
L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
L7 MUSIC SURR
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded
music sources.
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo music sources
recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings that
contain added reverb.
•
Recommended for 2-channel music sources.
•
•
Extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends these
sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard from all
directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that
simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
MUSIC
NEUTRAL
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
ON, OFF
Recommended for classical music sources, which are often
recorded in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the
stereo mix.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
OFF
ON, OFF
15.3kHz
15ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
MSURR
NEUTRAL
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
ON, OFF
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
OFF
ON, OFF
15.3kHz
15ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
DOLBY PLII + THX
DOLBY PLII MOVIE
MODE ADJUST
%!PLII + THXI
MODE ADJUST
%!PLII MOVIE
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
•
Similar to the DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, but uses
full-frequency stereo surround channels to realistically increase
the perceived width of the listening space.
Uses Dolby Pro Logic II decoding to derive five channels from
Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
•
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
Decodes five channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
•
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
Provides impressive enhancement compared to Dolby
Pro Logic decoding.
•
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.
•
Appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
loudspeakers.
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
ON, OFF
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
%!PLII MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
%!PRO LOGIC
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Similar to the DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode.
Designed for playback of stereo music sources.
•
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
Decodes four channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
Uses a mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff
above 7kHz.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
•
Available for comparison purposes, particularly with the L7
FILM, DOLBY PLII MOVIE, and dts NEO:6 FILM listening
modes.
PANORAMA
CTR WIDTH
DIMENSION
SURROUND DLY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
ON, OFF
3
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
0 to 15ms
NEUTRAL
10ms
Option/
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
Please note the following about dts NEO:6 listening mode
activation:
dts NEO:6 FILM
MODE ADJUST
dts neo:6 FILM
ꢂ
•
The dts NEO:6 listening modes cannot be assigned as the
preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources. However,
when the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 will
automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening mode if a dts
NEO:6 listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel
source was present.
•
•
Designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo film
sources.
Derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are
present (rear channels will be in parallel). Derives five channels
when only side or rear speakers are present. The subwoofer
channel is generated through bass management in the SDP-5.
•
•
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate the dts NEO:6
listening modes unless a 44.1 or 48kHz PCM digital source is
present. The dts NEO:6 listening modes are not available with
88.2 or 96kHz, Dolby Digital, or analog sources.
Option/
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
The dts NEO:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with
the front panel or remote control Mode ꢀand ꢁbuttons. The
dts NEO:6 FILM listening mode can also be activated with the
remote control dts button when a 2-channel input source is
present.
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
dts NEO:6 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
dts neo:6 MUSIC
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo music
sources.
Derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are
present (rear channels will be in parallel). Derives five channels
when only side or rear speakers are present. The subwoofer
channel is generated through bass management in the SDP-5.
Option/
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
MODE ADJUST
NIGHTCLUB
MODE ADJUST
CONCERT HALL
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
Designed for playback of “dry” music sources that benefit from
the addition of room reflections, especially music sources that
lack ambience in the recording.
•
•
•
Generates early reflections to simulate large listening spaces.
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode
uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
•
Generates early reflections to simulate small, intimate
listening spaces.
•
•
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode
uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
12
0 to 18
ON
ON, OFF
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
20m
1.72s
OFF
4 to 20m
LIVENESS
30ms to 20.2s
OFF, 1 to 100ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
-12 to +6dB
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
11
0 to 18
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
ON
ON, OFF
2.4kHz
-2dB
5m
4 to 20m
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
LIVENESS
196ms
5ms
30ms to 20.2s
OFF, 1 to 100ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
-12 to +6dB
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
9.0kHz
+3dB
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
MODE ADJUST
CHURCH
MODE ADJUST
CATHEDRAL
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,
reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening
spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size, such
as churches and chambers.
•
•
Similar to the CHURCH listening mode.
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,
reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces with
long reverberation time relative to their size, such as
cathedrals.
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses
a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
•
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses
a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
5
0 to 18
ON
ON, OFF
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
12
0 to 18
20m
1.56s
1.87s
24ms
2.4kHz
-3dB
4 to 30m
ON
ON, OFF
MID RT
24ms to 24.3s
5ms to 48.6s
OFF, 1 to 100ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
-12 to +6dB
30m
3.72s
4.47s
23ms
3.1kHz
-8dB
4 to 30m
BASS RT
MID RT
24ms to 24.3s
5ms to 48.6s
OFF, 1 to 100ms
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
-12 to +6dB
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
PANORAMA
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA
CALIBRATION
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of stereo and matrix-encoded sources.
•
•
The PANORAMA listening mode must be calibrated to take full
advantage of its effects.
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis algorithms to move the stereo
image outward from the front speakers, producing a wider
stereo field with greater depth.
For best results, it is recommended to center the primary
listening position between the front left and right speakers as
shown in the illustration centered at the top of page 5-13.
Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated
with various results.
•
Depends on proper location of the listening position and front
speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to
either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a
wider area than when the front speakers are positioned at a
large angle from the display device.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
SOURCE
LEFT & RIGHT
30deg
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
10 to 90deg
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
SPEAKER ANGLE
LISTENER POS
EFFECT LVL
+4dB
STEREO
+0
-12 to +6dB
+0
-127 to +127
BASS CONTENT
LOW FREQ WIDTH
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
INPUT BALANCE
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO
-25 to +25
Calibration parameter descriptions begin on the next page.
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:
3.1kHz
15ms
<|>
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary
listening position.
L< to <|> to >R
2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary
listening position are properly measured. Then, enter these
distances on the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu.
Refer to the next page
3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening
position is not centered between the front left and right
speakers, set the LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for
the difference. Refer to the LISTENER POS parameter
description on the next page for assistance.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
. . . Panorama Calibration continues on page 5-12
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
PANORAMA Calibration (continued from page 5-11)
Note:
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA
CALIBRATION
ꢂ
ꢂ
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived
direction of the sound, although both the front left
and right speakers generate the calibration source
signal.
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode: (continued )
3. Set the SOURCE parameter (next page) to RIGHT.
4. Begin playback of the calibration source. It is recommended to
use a familiar stereo source.
SPEAKER ANGLE
10 to 90deg
Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the
angle between the front left and right speakers and the primary
listening position.
5. When playback of the calibration source is in progress, set the
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter (next column) so the sound is not
heard in the left ear.
6. Set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT.
7. When playback of the calibration source is in progress, set the
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in the
right ear.
LISTENER POS
-127 to +127
Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within
the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of
an inch. Refer to the illustrations at the top of the next page for
more information about the LISTENER POS parameter range.
8. Set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT to confirm the
SPEAKER ANGLE and LISTENER POS parameter settings. When
the PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the
sound should be perceived to come from all around the
primary listening position. If this does not occur, begin again
with step 1.
Note:
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend
past the location of the front left and right speakers.
SOURCE
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
Controls the perceived direction of the calibration source signal.
When set to RIGHT, the sound is perceived to come from the right
of the primary listening position. When set to LEFT, the sound is
perceived to come from the left of the primary listening position.
When set to LEFT & RIGHT, the sound is perceived to come from
all around the primary listening position.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
LISTENER POS Parameter Settings
Front Left
Front Right
Front Left
Front Right
Front Left
Front Right
60°
L127
.
.
.
.
.
.
Center
.
.
.
.
.
.
R127
Primary Listening Position
L127
.
.
.
.
.
.
Center
.
.
.
.
.
.
R127
Negative settings (-127 to -1) compensate
for primary listening positions located to
the left of the center between the front left
and right speakers.
The +0 setting indicates a primary
listening position centered between the
front left and right speakers.
Positive settings (+1 to +127) compensate
for primary listening positions located to
the right of the center between the front
left and right speakers.
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
PARTY
MODE ADJUST
2-CHANNEL
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
•
Designed for playback of stereo sources.
Sends stereo sources to all channels.
Recommended for background music.
•
•
•
Designed for playback of stereo sources.
Sends stereo sources to the front and subwoofer channels.
Recommended for audio purists and comparison purposes
with other listening modes.
Option/
Parameter
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
MONO LOGIC
MONO
MODE ADJUST
MONO
MODE ADJUST
MONO LOGIC
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.
Sends mono sources to the center channel.
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis reverb algorithms to realistically
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of
the listening space.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ON
-12 to +6dB
ACADEMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON, OFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
MONO SURROUND
MODE ADJUST
MONO SURROUND
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.
Sends mono sources to all channels.
Option/
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
MODE ADJUST
5.1 L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
5.1 L7 TV
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded
film sources.
Based on the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically
tailored for broadcast sources.
•
Derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources. When
both side and rear speakers are present, the 5.1 L7 FILM
listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of
envelopment of the listening space.
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded
broadcast sources.
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded
broadcast sources.
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film
sources.
VOCAL ENHANCE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
15ms
OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OFF
ON, OFF
+0.0dB
ON
ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
15ms
OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX
MODE ADJUST
5.1 L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
5.1 THXI OR 5.1 THXI ULTRA2 OR 5.1 THXI SurEX
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film sources.
Based on the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically
tailored for music sources.
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter
setting, and the speaker setup. The table on the next page
indicates the conditions in which THX Surround EX and THX
Ultra2 decoding are engaged.
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded
music sources.
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music
sources.
•
•
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources
without Surround EX encoding.
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
•
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.
OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
When the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated, ASA
processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more
information.
15ms
OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
•
When the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated,
adaptive de-correlation increases the perceived width of the
listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel
increases the perceived width of the surround field in home
theaters.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
•
•
When the 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is activated, matrix
decoding derives three surround channels from 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital sources.
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
loudspeakers.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter
setting, and the speaker setup.
RE-EQUALIZER
SURROUND EX
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
ON
ON, OFF
–
–
–
–
The 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.
AUTO
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
The 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is available when THX
Surround EX decoding is engaged.
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
The 5.1 THX listening mode is available when neither THX
Ultra2 nor Surround EX decoding is engaged.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
The 5.1 THX ULTRA2 and 5.1 THX SurEX listening modes
cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are
present.
The table below indicates the conditions in which THX
Surround EX and THX Ultra2 decoding are engaged.
Note:
•
THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND
EX parameter is set to ON, or the SURROUND EX parameter is
set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
with THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect THX
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged source does not
include information in the input signal that identifies
THX Surround EX encoding.
•
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX
parameter is set to OFF, or the SURROUND EX parameter is set
to AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
Input
Source
5.1-Channel
Dolby Digital
5.1-Channel Surround EX-Encoded 5.1-Channel Surround EX-Encoded
Parameter
Setting
Dolby Digital (Flagged)
Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)
SURROUND EX: AUTO
SURROUND EX: ON
SURROUND EX: OFF
5.1 THX ULTRA2
5.1 THX SurEX
5.1 THX ULTRA2
5.1 THX SurEX
5.1 THX SurEX
5.1 THX ULTRA2
5.1 THX ULTRA2
5.1 THX SurEX
5.1 THX ULTRA2
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
5.1 THX MUSIC
DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX
MODE ADJUST
5.1 THXI MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
%!DIGITAL OR %!DIGITAL EX
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music
sources.
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for
Dolby Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX.
This listening mode can also be used with 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital sources with mixed results.
•
•
The 5.1 THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be activated unless
side and rear speakers are present.
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more
information.
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup. The table on the next page
indicates the conditions in which Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is engaged.
•
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
loudspeakers.
•
•
Decodes 5.1 discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. The five main channels are full frequency. The .1
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited
frequency range of 120Hz.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
When the DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is activated,
matrix decoding derives a surround back channel from the
other surround channels.
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Note:
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
AUTO
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
The 5.1 THX MUSIC listening mode can only be
activated with the front panel or remote control
Mode ꢀ and ꢁ buttons.
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
The table below indicates the conditions in which Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged.
Note:
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged source does not
include information in the input signal that identifies
Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.
•
•
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when the EX
DECODING parameter is set to ON, or the EX DECODING
parameter is set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is
detected.
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged when the
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF, or the EX DECODING
parameter is set to AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source recorded without or without Dolby Digital
Surround EX is detected.
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup.
–
–
–
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged.
The DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode is available when
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged.
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode cannot be activated
unless both side and rear speakers are present.
Input
5.1-Channel
Source
5.1-Channel Dolby
5.1-Channel Dolby
Parameter
Setting
Dolby Digital
Digital EX (Flagged)
Digital EX (Non-Flagged)
EX DECODING: AUTO
EX DECODING: ON
EX DECODING: OFF
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
5.1 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO LOGIC
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
•
Designed for converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded
input sources into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis reverb algorithms to realistically
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of
the listening space.
Sends downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals to
the front speakers and subwoofer.
Recommended for recording purposes.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ON
-12 to +6dB
CENTER MIX
SURROUND MIX
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
MASTER LEVEL
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
+0dB
+0dB
+0
-25 to +5dB
ACADEMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON, OFF
-5 to +5dB
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
-127 to +127
-5 to +5dB
+0dB
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-20.0 to +0.0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
+0.0dB
+0dB
SUB LEVEL
Note:
CUSTOM
When a 1.0 Dolby Digital input source is present, the
SDP-5 automatically activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC
listening mode.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO SURR
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.
Sends mono signals to all channels.
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.
Sends a mono signal to the center channel.
Option/
Parameter
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
dts-ES DECODING
Note:
The table below is not applicable to the dts-ES THX,
dts THX ULTRA2, and dts THX MUSIC listening
modes.
The table below indicates the conditions in which dts-ES
decoding is engaged.
•
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to ON, or the ES DECODING parameter is set
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.
•
•
dts-ES decoding is not engaged when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to OFF, or the ES DECODING parameter is set
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.
Listening mode names differ depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup.
–
–
–
dts-ES listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding
is engaged.
dts listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is
not engaged.
dts-ES listening modes cannot be activated unless both side
and rear speakers are present.
Input
Source
5.1-Channel
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES
6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES
5.1-Channel dts
Parameter
Setting
ES DECODING: AUTO
ES DECODING: ON
ES DECODING: OFF
dts
dts-ES
dts
dts-ES
dts-ES
dts
dts-ES
dts-ES
dts
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
dts(-ES) L7 FILM
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
dts-ES L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
dts-ES L7 MUSIC
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
•
•
A proprietary listening mode.
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) film
sources.
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) music
sources.
•
Uses an advanced matrix to derive seven channels from 5.1
and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources. When both side and rear
speakers are present , the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode also
increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of
the listening space.
•
•
Based on the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically
tailored for music sources.
Recommended for 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) music sources.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
VOCAL ENHANCE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
Recommended for 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) film sources.
OFF
ON, OFF
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
15ms
+0.0dB
OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
-10.0 to +0.0dB
AUTO, ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
ON, OFF
ES DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
ON, OFF
ON
ON, OFF
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
15ms
+0.0dB
OFF
OFF, 1 to 30ms
-10.0 to +0.0dB
AUTO, ON, OFF
ES DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
•
•
When the dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated, ASA
processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more
information.
dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX
MODE ADJUST
ULTRA2 OR dts-ES THX1
ꢂ
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-
encoded dts-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES film
sources.
When the dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated,
adaptive de-correlation increases the perceived width of the
listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel
increases the perceived width of the surround field in home
theaters.
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup. The table below indicates the
conditions in which THX Ultra2 and dts-ES decoding are
engaged.
•
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
loudspeakers.
•
•
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel dts sources without
dts-ES encoding.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
RE-EQUALIZER
LFE MIX
ON
ON, OFF
+0.0dB
AUTO
-10.0 to +0.0dB
AUTO, ON, OFF
ES DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Input
Source
5.1-Channel
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES
6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES
5.1-Channel dts
Parameter
Setting
ES DECODING: AUTO
ES DECODING: ON
ES DECODING: OFF
dts THX ULTRA2
dts-ES THX
dts-ES THX
dts-ES THX
dts-ES THX
dts-ES THX
dts THX ULTRA2
dts THX ULTRA2
dts THX ULTRA2
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
The table at the bottom of the previous page indicates the
conditions in which THX Ultra2 and dts-ES decoding are
engaged.
dts THX MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
DTS THX MUSIC
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts music sources.
•
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to OFF, or the ES DECODING parameter is set
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.
The dts THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be activated unless
side and rear speakers are present.
•
•
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more
information.
•
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to ON, or the ES DECODING parameter is set
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
loudspeakers.
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
–
–
–
The dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
The dts-ES THX listening mode is available when dts-ES
decoding is engaged.
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
The dts THX ULTRA2 and dts(-ES) THX listening modes
cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are
present.
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Note:
The dts THX MUSIC listening mode can only be
activated with the front panel or remote control
Mode ꢀ and ꢁ buttons.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
dts(-ES)
dts(-ES) 2-CHAN
MODE ADJUST
dts-ES
MODE ADJUST
dts-ES 2-CHAN
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources.
•
•
•
Designed for converting 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources
into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.
Decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from dts(-ES)
sources. The six main channels are full-frequency. The .1
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited
frequency range of 120Hz.
Sends downmixed 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) input signals to
the front speakers and subwoofer.
Recommended for recording purposes.
•
Appropriate for dts(-ES) film sources.
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Option/
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
CENTER MIX
SURROUND MIX
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
MASTER LEVEL
LFE MIX
+0dB
+0dB
+0
-25 to +5dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
AUTO
-10.0 to +0.0dB
AUTO, ON, OFF
-5 to +5dB
ES DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
-127 to +127
-5 to +5dB
+0dB
+0.0dB
AUTO
+0dB
-20.0 to +0.0dB
AUTO, ON, OFF
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
ES DECODING
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
5.1a BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
2CH BYPASS
ꢂ
ꢂ
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as
DVD-A or SACD players.
•
•
Designed for playback of 2-channel analog sources.
Analog audio input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Front L/R. These input signals
receive no internal processing.
The 5.1-channel analog input connectors are sent directly to
the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors as
shown on page 3-46. These signals receive no internal
processing.
•
•
•
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
when a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the MAIN
ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.
•
When both side and rear speakers are present, surround
channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.
To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT
LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to
deactivate the associated surround speakers.
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when the
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO and
a digital audio source is present.
No parameters are available for the 2CH BYPASS listening
mode.
•
•
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
whenever one of the 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors
is assigned to the selected input.
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is the only listening mode
available for 5.1-channel analog sources.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and
audio (tone) controls are not available when the 2CH
BYPASS listening mode is activated.
Option/
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and
audio (tone) controls are not available when the 5.1a
BYPASS listening mode is activated.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS
BASS CONTENT
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO
Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono, and stereo recordings.
When set to BINAURL, the SDP-5 activates low-frequency
compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded
with dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for
sources recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for
sources recorded with stereo bass.
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.
When set to ON, the SDP-5 provides an increased sense of
spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers.
This enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers
are positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when
the primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The
effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For
best results, it is recommended to position the surround speakers
to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.
BASS ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction
that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The
effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies depending
on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to
reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended to use front, side, or
rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz
or lower.
ACADEMY FILTER
ON, OFF
When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono
film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than
more recent mono film sources.
Note:
When the BASS ENHANCE parameter is set to ON,
most listening spaces have a 2 to 3dB reduction in
low-frequency energy. It is recommended to use the
AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS parameter to
compensate for this reduction.
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON, OFF
Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the SDP-5
continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to
ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with
maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the
selected listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended
to set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to
OFF for music sources.
When set to ON, the BASS ENHANCE parameter might
damage speakers that are not capable of producing low
frequencies below 80Hz.
CAUTION
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
BASS RT
5ms to 48.6s
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
-127 to +127
Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for low-frequency information to decay below
60dB in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the
MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller
listening spaces.
Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. It is
recommended to set this parameter to +0 unless the center channel
is not properly timed and the value of the error is known.
COMPRESSION
AUTO, ON, OFF
Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialog
intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input
sources. When set to ON, full compression is applied regardless of
volume level. When set to OFF, compression is not applied. It is
recommended to set this parameter to AUTO or ON for Dolby
Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,
especially for night time viewing to avoid disturbing others.
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
CAUTION
CALIBRATION
Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which
can be used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to
page 5-11 for more information.
CTR WIDTH
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is
heard from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center
image is heard from just the front left and right speakers as a
“phantom” center image. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center
image is heard in various combinations of the front and center
speakers.
CENTER
OFF, -30 to +12dB
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
OUTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Center.
CENTER DEPTH
0 to 18
CUSTOM
Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived
distance of the center speaker from the listening position.
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
ꢂ
ꢂ
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom
and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to
restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode.
CENTER MIX
-25 to +5dB
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-30
Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. It is
recommended to set this parameter to +0dB for film sources and
-5dB for music sources.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions
DIMENSION
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
(continued from page 5-29)
Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be
useful with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance
among all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced
toward the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the
sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When
set to REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the
listening space.
CUSTOM VS PRESET
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected,
the listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition – as if all
parameters had been restored to their factory-default settings. No
parameter settings are affected when this option is selected. The
listening mode will revert to its modified condition when the
CUSTOM VS PRESET option is closed.
EFFECT LVL
-12 to +6dB
Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode.
ES DECODING
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls the dts-ES decoding feature, which can be used to extract
a rear channel from dts sources.
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its
custom condition – with all of its current parameter settings. The
CUSTOM option is available even when no parameter settings have
been adjusted. However, the PRESET and CUSTOM options will
sound identical until adjustments are made.
•
•
•
When set to ON, dts-ES decoding is engaged for all dts(-ES)
sources.
When set to OFF, dts-ES decoding is not engaged for all dts(-ES)
sources.
To toggle between the factory-default and modified versions of
the selected listening mode:
When set to AUTO, dts-ES decoding is engaged when a
5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded
dts-ES source is detected. dts-ES decoding is not engaged
when a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the
CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu opens, press
the Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to toggle between the PRESET
(factory-default) and CUSTOM (customized) versions of the
selected listening mode.
dts-ES listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is
engaged. dts listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding
is not engaged. dts-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both
side and rear speakers are present. Refer to page 5-22 for more
information.
3. When finished, press the Menu ꢃarrow to close the CUSTOM
VS PRESET menu.
4. Press the Menu ꢃ arrow to close the CUSTOM menu and
return to the listening mode menu.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote
control dts button while a dts(-ES) input source is present toggles
the ES DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and
OFF settings.
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The DOLBY DIGITAL
listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is not engaged. Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding
cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present.
Refer to page 5-18 for more information.
Note:
The dts(-ES) STATUS menu includes the SB level meter
when:
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote
control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input
source is present activates the DOLBY DIGITAL EX or DOLBY DIGITAL
listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle the EX DECODING
parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
•
The ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a
5.1-channel dts source is present.
•
The ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and
a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is present.
FRONT STEERING
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center
speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to
the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is
applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.
When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended to
set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to
MUSIC, MSURR, or OFF for music sources.
EX DECODING
Controls the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding feature, which
can be used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital sources.
AUTO, ON, OFF
•
•
•
When set to ON, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
When set to OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
INPUT BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input
connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible
channel imbalance.
When set to AUTO, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
recorded with Surround EX is detected. Dolby Digital Surround
EX decoding is not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Surround EX is
detected.
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-32
•
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround
EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
A non-flagged source does not include information in the input
signal that identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions
MASTER LEVEL
-5 to +5dB
(continued from page 5-31)
Adjusts the output level of 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded sources.
LFE MIX
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
MID RT
24ms to 24.3s
Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a
5.1- or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the Main Zone
audio output labeled Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven
other channels might be combined with the LFE information to
create the subwoofer output signal, which significantly increases
subwoofer output levels. Careful adjustment of this parameter
allows achievement of proper tonal balance and reduces the risk of
subwoofer overload. When the speaker setup does not include a
subwoofer, LFE information is mixed into speakers for which the
corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu parameter is set to FULL or
to the lowest crossover points.
Works with the BASS RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for mid-frequency information to decay below
60dB in level.
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, or SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
CAUTION
OUTPUT LEVELS
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
OUTPUT LEVELS
ꢂ
ꢂ
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which can be used to adjust
output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled
Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R. The OUTPUT LEVELS
option does not appear on listening mode menus when the
listening mode does not accommodate multi-channel output
signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter appears. For
instance, the Mono listening mode menu includes a SUB LEVEL
parameter.
LISTENER POS
Refer to page 5-12.
-127 to +127
LIVENESS
30ms to 20.2s
Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time.
Option/
Default
Setting
Possible
Settings
Parameter
LOW FREQ WIDTH
Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This
correction is applied to un-correlated input signals below 60Hz.
-25 to +25dB
CENTER
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
PANORAMA
ON, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OFF, 1 to 30ms
When set to ON, extends the front stereo image to include
surround channel signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect
with side wall imaging.
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying
the arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended to
increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are
located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired
in the listening space.
Note:
The DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode PANORAMA
parameter should not be confused with the separate
PANORAMA listening mode (5-11).
REAR L/R
OFF, -30 to +12dB
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode) OUTPUT LEVELS
REAR L/R
ꢂ
ꢂ
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Rear L/R.
PRE-DELAY
OFF, 1 to 100ms
Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of
reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound
larger. Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, it
is recommended to begin with the parameter set to OFF, then
make adjustments accordingly.
RESET MODE
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
RESET MODE
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-
default settings.
RE-EQUALIZER
ON, OFF
Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.
When set to ON, the SDP-5 applies a high-frequency filter. When set
to OFF, the SDP-5 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is
recommended to set this parameter to ON for film sources, as
many films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too
bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening
mode:
1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path. The “PRESS RIGHT V TO
RESTORE MODE” drop-down message.
2. When the drop-down message opens, press the Menu ꢂ
arrow to restore the factory-default version of the selected
listening mode and close the message. Press the Menu ꢃ
arrow to close the message without restoring the factory-
default version of the selected listening mode.
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-34
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions
SIZE
4 to 20 or 30m
(continued from page 5-33)
Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4 to 20 or 30m
range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of the
space to increase the reverb effect.
RESET MODE (continued)
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
RESET MODE
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
CAUTION
3. Press the Menu ꢃ arrow to close the CUSTOM menu and
return to the listening mode menu.
SOUND STAGE
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Note:
Dynamically controls the relative balance of the Main Zone audio
output connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R
output levels are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance
of the sound field to the front of the listening space. When set to
NEUTRAL, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are slightly
attenuated by 3dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound
field to the center of the listening space. When set to REAR, Side
L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not attenuated, preserving the
intended balance of the sound field.
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is
selected to restore the factory-default version of the
selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER
SETUP menu listening mode parameter is
automatically set to OFF.
ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It
is recommended to begin with a low setting to simulate
high-frequency absorbative spaces.
SOURCE
Refer to page 5-12.
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
10 to 90deg
SIDE L/R
OFF, -30 to +12dB
SPEAKER ANGLE
Refer to page 5-12.
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
OUTPUT LEVELS
SIDE L/R
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Side L/R.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
SDP-5
SPEECH DETECT
ON, OFF
SURROUND DLY
0 to 15ms
Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set
to ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural
echo in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are
present, the front left and right channels are independently used as
inputs for ambience synthesis. When strong monaural speech is
present in the input source, the monaural component of the
ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect
is increased. When set to OFF, the amount of ambience synthesis is
dynamically controlled.
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying
the arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is
recommended to increase the setting when a greater sense of
depth is desired in the listening space.
SURROUND EX
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be
used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources.
•
•
•
When set to ON, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
SUB LEVEL
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Subwoofer. The SUB LEVEL parameter appears
on listening mode menus when the listening mode does not
accommodate multi-channel output signals.
When set to OFF, THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged
for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
When set to AUTO, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged
when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX
Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding
is not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
SUBWOOFER
OFF, -30 to +12dB
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
OUTPUT LEVELS
SUBWOOFER
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Subwoofer.
•
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX
encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A
non-flagged source does not include information in the input
signal that identifies THX Surround EX encoding.
SURR ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the Main Zone audio
output connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only
applied to output signals generated by the SDP-5.
The 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is available when THX Surround
EX decoding is engaged. The 5.1 THX and 5.1 THX ULTRA2
listening modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is
not engaged. THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged
unless both side and rear speakers are present. Refer to page 5-16
for more information.
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-36
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE ADJUST
JBL Synthesis
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions
(continued from page 5-31)
SURROUND EX (continued)
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote
control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input source
is present activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, or 5.1 THX
SurEX listening mode.
Note:
Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting
produces low-level clicks in the front speakers.
SURROUND MIX
-5 to +5dB
Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is
recommended to set this parameter to +2 or +3dB for all input
sources.
VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
Controls the level of dialog boost in the Main Zone audio output
connector labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog
intelligibility, particularly at lower volume levels.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
TROUBLESHOOTING
JBL Synthesis
3. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE
ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear on the on-screen and
front panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate
mute, press the front panel or remote control Mute button or
use the front panel volume knob or the remote control VOL ꢀ
and ꢁ buttons to adjust volume level.
The SDP-5 does not power on.
1. Attempt to power on the SDP-5 with the front panel standby
button and remote control On button.
4. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN
parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is
assigned to the selected input. Refer to page 3-6 for more
information.
2. Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the c (“on”)
position.
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between
the rear panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.
5. Make sure the SDP-5 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,
follow the instructions that begin on page 2-18 to open the
STATUS menu for the current input source.
4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.
6. Make sure all associated power amplifiers are powered on.
The remote control does not work.
1. Make sure the front panel IR receiver window shown on page
2-3 is not obstructed. The remote control must be in line-of-
sight with the receiver for proper operation. Refer to page 2-9
for more information.
Dialog sounds muffled.
1. If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make
sure a custom – as opposed to a JBL Synthesis – speaker setup
is selected. Then, make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu
CENTER parameter is set to NONE (3-29).
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted
with the proper polarity. Refer to page 1-5 for instructions to
install new batteries.
A humming sound is present in the audio.
The SDP-5 is powered on, but there is no audio.
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground
loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the
cable provider for assistance.
1. Examine the audio cables to ensure a good connection to the
associated amplifier.
2. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be
increased with the front panel volume knob (2-3) or the
remote control VOL ꢀ and ꢁ buttons (2-14).
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated
component is properly grounded and connected to the same
electrical circuit as the SDP-5.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
SDP-5
2. Document all user-defined settings on the installation
worksheet that begins on page A-14. Then, follow the
instructions on the next page to restore factory-default
settings.
The SDP-5 is powered on, but there is no video.
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-video cables – to
ensure a good connection to the associated component.
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN (page 3-11) and
COMPONENT IN (page 3-12) parameters to ensure the
appropriate video connector is assigned to the selected input.
3. Contact an authorized JBL Synthesis dealer.
4. Contact JBL Synthesis customer service at 818-830-8757.
Note:
Visit
RF interference is present in the audio or video.
www.jblsynthesis.com
for
additional
1. Make sure the SDP-5 is not positioned near unshielded TV or
FM antennas, cable TV decoders, and other RF-emitting
devices.
troubleshooting information.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that
should be performed on a periodic basis.
2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever
possible.
The SDP-5 is exhibiting erratic behavior.
•
Clean the SDP-5 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners, or strong
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool
or metal polish. If the SDP-5 is exposed to a dusty
environment, a low-pressure blower can be used to remove
dust from its exterior surface.
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the | (“off”) position. Wait
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to the c
(“on”) position.
2. Document all user-defined settings on the installation
worksheet that begins on page A-14. Then, follow the
instructions on the next page to restore factory-default
settings.
•
Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote
control requires two AA batteries. When these batteries are low
on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition
that prevents it from operating the SDP-5. When this occurs,
follow the instructions on page 1-5 to replace the batteries.
Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
If all else fails . . .
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the | (“off”) position. Wait
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to the c
(“on”) position.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
JBL Synthesis
is pressed, too much time has passed. If this occurs, begin
again with step 2.
RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and
user-defined values are restored to their factory-default settings.
Before restoring factory-default settings, it is recommended to
record all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet that
begins on page A-14.
5. Press the remote control Menu ꢀ and ꢁ arrows to highlight
the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to
restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to
close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory-
default settings.
To restore factory-default settings:
1. Record all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet
that begins on page A-14. When factory-default settings are
restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to
their factory-default settings.
6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the Menu ꢂ
arrow to select this option.
•
If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the
FACTORY SETTINGS message shown below appears on the
on-screen and front panel displays. When this message
appears, press a front panel or remote control button to
restart the SDP-5.
2. If the SDP-5 is powered on, press the front panel standby
button or the remote control Off button to activate standby
mode and deactivate the SDP-5. If the SDP-5 is in standby
mode, proceed to step 3.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS
ꢂ
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
3. Press the front panel standby button or the remote control On
button to deactivate standby mode and activate the SDP-5.
•
If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS
menu will close and the two-line status (2-18) opens on
the on-screen and front panel displays.
4. Quickly press and hold the front panel or remote control Mute
button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown below
opens on the on-screen and front panel displays.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
The Mute button must be pressed within 2 seconds of
activating the SDP-5. If the message "MUTE ON" appears on
the on-screen and front panel displays when the Mute button
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
Appendix
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL Synthesis
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio Input & Output Connectors
Main Zone Audio Performance (continued)
Analog Audio Inputs
• 8 stereo (RCA) or 5 stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors
Input Impedance
Output Level
• 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
• 150mVrms typical, 6Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)
Digital Audio Inputs
• 4 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and 4 S/PDIF optical (TosLink)
connectors
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at +6dB
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-
958, S/PDIF standards
Output Impedance
• 100Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)
• 50Ω in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors)
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz sample rates
• Accepts 16-24 bits PCM audio, Dolby Digital, dts, and
dts-ES discrete data formats
Zone 2 Audio Performance
Main Zone Audio
Outputs
• 8 unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,
Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R
D/A Conversion
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ∆∑ architecture
Frequency Response
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz,
reference 1kHz
Zone 2 Audio Outputs • 1 unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo
connector
THD + Noise
• Below 0.005% at 1kHz, maximum output level
• 103dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
• 1 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector
Dynamic Range
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Input Sensitivity
Input Impedance
Output Level
• 103dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
• 200mVrms (4Vrms for maximum output level)
• 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
Main Zone Audio Performance
A/D Conversion
D/A Conversion
Frequency Response
• 24-bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ∆∑ architecture
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ∆∑ architecture
• 200mVrms typical, 4Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at 0dB
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.05dB/-0.1dB, -0.5dB at 40kHz,
reference 1kHz
Output Impedance
• 100Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)
THD + Noise
• Below 0.008% at 1kHz, maximum output level
• 108dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
• 108dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
Dynamic Range
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Input Sensitivity
• 200mVrms (2Vrms for maximum output level) at 0dB
input gain
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
Video Input & Output Connectors
Component Video Performance (continued)
Video Inputs
• 5 composite (RCA), 5 S-video, and 3 component
video (RCA)
Insertion Loss
Bandwidth
• <3dB
• >150MHz
Video Outputs
• 2 composite (RCA, 1 monitor and 1 Zone2), 2 S-video
(1 monitor and 1 Zone2), and 1 component (RCA)
Other
Trigger Outputs
• 1 power on/off and 1 programmable connector on
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)
Composite & S-video Performance
Compatibility
Switching
• NTSC, PAL, and SECAM
• Active
RS-232 Serial Input/ • 2 9-pin D-sub connectors
Output
Output Level
Impedance
• 1.0V peak-to-peak
• 75Ω
Power Requirements
• 90-250 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input),
detachable power cord
SDP-5
Dimensions & Weight
• Height (with feet): 5.04 inches (128mm)
• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)
• Depth: 14.85 inches (377mm)
• Weight: 24lbs (10.7kg)
Input Return Loss
Differential Gain
Differential Phase
Bandwidth
• >40dB
• <0.5%
• <0.5°
• >25MHz
• <0.3%
Rack Mounting
Environment
• Brackets are provided for installation in a standard 19"
equipment rack (3 rack units required).
K Factor
• Operating Temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
• Storage Temperature: -30° to 75°C (-22° to 167°F)
• Relative Humidity: 95% maximum without condensation
Gain
•
0.15dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Frequency Response
• >65dB
• 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/-0.3dB
Remote Control
• Hand-held, backlit infrared remote control unit
• Requires 2 AA batteries (Alkaline batteries recommended)
Component Video Performance
Compatibility
Switching
• 3-channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent
• Passive
Impedance
• 75Ω
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL Synthesis
MENU TREE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The menu tree that begins on the next page is based on Software
Version 1.0.
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC
Standard(s) to which Conformity is Declared:
EN55022:1994 + A1:1995 + A2:1997, EN55024:1998,
EN61000-3-2: 2000, EN61000-3-3:2000, and
EN60065: 1998
Manufacturer:
Lexicon, Inc.
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s)
and Standard(s) specified above.
Type of Equipment:
Model:
Digital Controller
JBL Synthesis SDP-5
February 2003
Date:
Lexicon, Inc.
Vice President of Engineering
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel: 781-280-0300
Fax: 781-280-0490
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
TRIGGER SETUP
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
L7 FILM
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
dts neo:6 FILM
dts neo:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
8 STEREO INPUTS
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
INPUT SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
OR
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MAIN PWR ON -30dB
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE
ZONE PWR ON -30dB
LOCK OPTIONS
MODES UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
SETUP UNLOCKED
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
continued on page A-6
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THXI SurEX
5.1 THXI MUSIC
%! DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
DTS-ES L7 FILM
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES THX
DTS THXI MUSIC
DTS-ES
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SPEAKER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
OFF
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
R
SR
RR
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
ALWAYS ON
75%
STATUS
2 SECONDS
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
TOP
NTSC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF, 1 to 60ms
C
L
100%
80Hz
ON
75%
50%
25%
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SDP-5
80Hz
80Hz
ON
OFF
^
continued on page A-8
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
SECAM
PAL
NTSC
ON
OFF
ON
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
OFF
ON
OFF
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL
Menu Tree (continued from page A-5)
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of the desired input (e.g.
DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below. The
parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input
is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter
settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default
parameter settings for each input.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
INPUT SETUP
ꢀ
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
CD
LOCK OPTIONS
TUNER
AUX
continued from page A-5
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
SAT INPUT SETUP
NAME
TV INPUT SETUP
NAME
TUNER INPUT SETUP
DVD1
SAT
TV
NAME
TUNER
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
OPTICAL-1
ANALOG-1
+0dB
S-VIDEO-3
3
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
OPTICAL-2
ANALOG-3
+0dB
S-VIDEO-5
NONE
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
NONE
ANALOG-4
+0dB
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
NONE
NONE
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
L7 FILM
L7 TV
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 TV
%!D
5.1 L7 TV
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM-
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
AUX
DVD2 INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
VCR INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
CD INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
AUX INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
DVD2
COAX-2
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-2
2
VCR
NONE
ANALOG-2
+0dB
S-VIDEO-4
NONE
CD
COAX-3
NONE
OPTICAL-3
NONE
+0dB
+0dB
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
NONE
L7 MUSIC
NONE
L7 MUSIC
L7 FILM
L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
%!D
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the
corresponding menu shown below. These menus are
identical regardless of which input is selected. The DVD1
INPUT SETUP menu is shown at the left as an example.
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu shown
on the previous page may be substituted.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME DVD1
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
COAX-1
NONE
+0dB
S-VIDEO-1
1
L7 FILM
%!D
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
DIGITAL
ANLG
DMIX
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
continued from page A-6
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
DVD1 INPUT NAME
DVD1 ANALOG IN
DVD1 VIDEO IN
DVD1 COMPONENT
DVD1 %!D MODE
DVD1 MAIN ADV*
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
NONE
COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
COMPOSITE-3
COMPOSITE-4
COMPOSITE-5
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
S-VIDEO-4
S-VIDEO-5
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
NONE
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THX
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
PRESS MENU V TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME
%!DIGITAL
OFF
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
ON
OFF
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1 2-CH MODE
L7 FILM
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
DVD1
^
USE LAST
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE
AUTO
OFF
The appearance of the
ANALOG IN menu depends
on the configuration of
the analog audio input
connectors. Refer to page
3-8 for more information.
NONE
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
Selecting the INPUT SETUP
menu MAIN ADVANCED
option opens the MAIN
ADV menu shown above.
The parameters on the left
side of this menu are
identical regardless of
which input is selected.
The settings on the right
side are adjustable. Default
parameter settings differ
from input to input. The
MAIN ADV menu shown
above indicates the default
parameter settings for the
DVD1 input. The MAIN ADV
menus shown on page 3-17
indicate default parameter
settings for each input.
DVD1 DTS-ES MODE
DTS-ES L7 FILM
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES THX
DTS-ES
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
USE LAST
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
COAX-2
COAX-3
ON
OFF
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
MANUAL
COAX-4
OFF
+0dB
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
NONE
-18 to +12dB
AUTO GAIN
+0.0dB
Indicates the current
amount of analog audio
input level adjustment for
the selected analog audio
input connector. This
parameter cannot be
adjusted.
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
USE LAST
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL
Menu Tree (continued from page A-7)
Selecting a SPEAKER SETUP menu option opens the
corresponding menu shown below and at the right (e.g.
selecting the CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM
SETUP menu shown below).
SPEAKER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
continued on page A-9
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
C
L
80Hz
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
REAR SPEAKERS
80Hz
NONE
CUSTOM SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
ꢀ
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE V
BUTTON WILL
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS
ON
OFF
7CH SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
N/A
APART
ON
OFF
ASA
ASA
TOGETHER
CLOSE
APART
FEET
METERS
0.0 to 30.0ft
Parameters for which the
corresponding speaker is
not selected cannot be
adjusted. These parameters
are automatically set to
N/A.
SUBWOOFER
FULL
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
REAR L/R SPEAKERS
FULL
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS
FULL
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
CENTER SPEAKER
FULL
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS
FULL
30Hz
40Hz
50Hz
60Hz
70Hz
80Hz
70Hz
80Hz
70Hz
80Hz
70Hz
80Hz
70Hz
80Hz
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
NONE
THX 80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
SPEAKER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
ꢀ
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
R
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
LOCK OPTIONS
C
L
continued from page A-8
LEVELS CALIBRATION
80Hz
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
M
SUB
SL RL
80Hz 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
BASS PEAK LIMITER
CAL NOISE
DACS CALIBRATION
ꢀ
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
+0.0dB
ON
OFF
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
SUB LIMITER
SUB LIMIT ADJ
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
100dB
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
ON
OFF
-18 to +12dB
-18 to +12dB
75 to 120dB
Parameters for which the
corresponding speaker is
not selected cannot be
adjusted. These parameters
are automatically set to
N/A.
Parameters for which the
corresponding speaker is
not selected cannot be
adjusted. These parameters
are automatically set to
N/A.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
ON
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
<|>
<|>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<|>
B<
<|>
>F
L<
<|>
>R
ON
OFF
-3.0 to +3.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL
Menu Tree (continued from page A-9)
Selecting a MODE ADJUST menu listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu shown below and on the
next page. The parameters on the left side of these menus differ from listening mode to listening mode. The settings on
the right side are adjustable. The listening mode menus shown below and on the next page indicate default parameter
settings for each listening mode. All listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown on pages A-12 and
A-13. The OUTPUT LEVELS, CUSTOM, and PANORAMA CALIBRATION menus are shown on page A-12.
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
L7 FILM
L7 TV
L7 MUSIC
ꢀ
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
L7 MUSIC SURR
%!PLII + THX
%!PLII MOVIE
%!PLII MUSIC
%!PRO LOGIC
dts neo:6 FILM
dts neo:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 L7 TV
R
L7 FILM
L7 MUSIC SURR
dts neo:6 FILM
CHURCH
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
ON
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MSURR
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
MID RT
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5
ON
20m
1.56s
1.87s
24ms
2.4kHz
-3dB
ON
REAR
OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
OFF
R
dts neo:6 MUSIC
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
NIGHTCLUB
%!PLII + THX
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
LIVENESS
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
11
ON
5m
L7 TV
CATHEDRAL
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THXI*
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
ON
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
MID RT
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
12
ON
30m
3.72s
4.47s
23ms
3.1kHz
-8dB
196ms
5ms
9.0kHz
+3dB
5.1 THXI MUSIC
%!DIGITAL*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
DTS-ES L7 FILM*
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC*
DTS-ES THX *
DTS THXI MUSIC
DTS-ES*
FILM
OFF
REAR
OFF
%!PLII MOVIE THX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
CONCERT HALL
CUSTOM
%!PLII MUSIC THX
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
LIVENESS
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
12
ON
20m
1.72s
OFF
2.4kHz
-2dB
PANORAMA
CTR WIDTH
OFF
3
PANORAMA
EFFECT LVL
DTS-ES 2-CHAN*
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
L7 MUSIC
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
10ms
+4dB
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURROUND DLY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
BASS CONTENT STEREO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
SURR ROLLOFF
+0
3.1kHz
* These listening mode names differ depending on the
input source, the speaker configuration, and certain
parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode
Descriptions section that begins on page 5-3 for more
information.
OFF
OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
INPUT BALANCE
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
<|>
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
%!PRO LOGIC THX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
PARTY
5.1 L7 FILM
5.1 THXI
5.1 MONO LOGIC
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC
DTS-ES 2-CHAN
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
SURROUND EX
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
AUTO
OFF
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ON
3.1kHz
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
CENTER MIX
+0dB
+0dB
+0
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
OFF
ON
ACADEMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
OFF
SURROUND MIX
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
MASTER LEVEL
+0.0dB
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
+0dB
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
AUTO
+0dB
2-CHANNEL
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OFF
+0.0dB
ESI DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ESI DECODING
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
+0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MONO SURR
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 THXI MUSIC
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
+0.0dB
MONO LOGIC
EFFECT LVL
ACADEMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
DTS-ES THX
5.1a BYPASS
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 L7 TV
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
-9dB
ON
3.1kHz
RE-EQUALIZER
LFE MIX
ESI DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
+0.0dB
AUTO
5.1 MONO
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
OFF
OFF
+0dB
%!DIGITALTHX
2CH BYPASS
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
NO PARAMETERS
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
+0.0dB
MONO SURROUND
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
DTS-ES L7 FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
ESI DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
DTS THXI MUSIC
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
OFF
OFF
ON
5.1 L7 MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
5.1 2-CHANNEL
CENTER MIX
SURROUND MIX
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
MASTER LEVEL
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
OFF
DTS-ES THX
LFE MIX
ESI DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0
+0dB
OFF
+0.0dB
+0dB
OFF
OFF
OFF
+0.0dB
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL
Menu Tree (continued from page A-11)
5 SPKR ENHANCE
CALIBRATION
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
-127 to +127
EFFECT LVL
LIVENESS
PANORAMA
ON
OFF
-12 to +6dB
30ms to 20.2s
ON
OFF
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SOURCE
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg
LISTENER POS +0
LEFT & RIGHT
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PERFORMED
PROPERLY
ACADEMY FILTER
COMPRESSION
ESI DECODING
AUTO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
-25 to +25dB
PRE-DELAY
OFF, 1 to 100ms
ON
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-127
+0
+127
AUTO AZIMUTH
CTR WIDTH
EX DECODING
MASTER LEVEL
-5 to +5dB
RE-EQUALIZER
10 to 90deg
ON
OFF
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
AUTO
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
RIGHT
LEFT & RIGHT
LEFT
BASS CONTENT
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
FRONT STEERING
MID RT
REAR DLY OFFSET
OFF
BINAURL
MONO
STEREO
24ms to 24.3s
OFF, 1 to 30ms
MSURR
MUSIC
FILM
PRESS RIGHT V
TO RESTORE MODE
BASS ENHANCE
CENTER DEPTH
CENTER MIX
INPUT BALANCE
OUTPUT LEVELS
0UTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
SIDE L/R
ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
PRESET
CUSTOM
ON
OFF
0 to 18
L<
<|>
>R
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
BASS RT
DIMENSION
LFE MIX
SIZE
OFF, -30 to +12dB
5ms to 48.6s
-25 to +5dB
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
4 to 20 or 30m
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
When the Shift command bank is active, pressing the remote control Stat button opens the STATUS menu for the current
input source. This menu contains parameters that provide information about the current input source and listening mode.
STATUS menus are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), digital, and analog input sources. Refer to page 2-18
for more information.
SOUND STAGE
SURROUND DLY
SURROUND EX
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
0 to 15ms
STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode. These parameters
cannot be adjusted. Refer to the STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions section that begins on page 2-23 for more
information.
SPEECH DETECT
2CH STATUS
%!D STATUS
PG1
%!D STATUS
PG2
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
ON
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
EX ENCODIN G
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
dB
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
0
-6
SURROUND MIX
SUB LEVEL
-15
-30
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-5 to +5dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
-45
-45
DTS-ES STATUS
PG1
DTS-ES STATUS
PG2
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
SURR ROLLOFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
+6.0dB
+3.0dB
+0.0dB
ESI ENCODING
dB
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
0
-6
-15
-30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Activating the SDP-5 while pressing and holding the
front panel or remote control Mute button opens the
FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown below. Refer to page
6-4 for more information.
-45
2CH BYPASS STATUS
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS
ꢀ
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL Synthesis
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
AUX
INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
DD D
dts-ES
MAIN ADV
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD
COMPONENT OSD
ZONE2 IN
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
SDP-5
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SPEAKER SETUP
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT
CENTER
SIDE LEFT/RIGHT
REAR LEFT/RIGHT
SUBWOOFER
THX ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz
ASA
UNITS
CAL NOISE
SUB LIMITER
SUB LIMIT ADJ
SETTINGS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
Circle One
8 STEREO INPUTS
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
. . . Installation Worksheet continues on page A-16
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
JBL Synthesis
Installation Worksheet (continued from page A-15)
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
DISPLAY SETUP
TRIGGER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
STATUS
REMOTE ONLY
SETUP
If the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF,
circle the inputs and listening modes selected
for program operation.
AUDIO CNTRL
MODES
POSITION
DVD1
PANORAMA
FORMAT
DVD2
PARTY
SETTING
AUDIO CONTROLS
SAT
2-CHANNEL
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
VCR
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
BASS
TV
CD
TREBLE
TUNER
5.1 L7 FILM
AUX
5.1 L7 TV
TILT EQ
ZONE2 INPUTS
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1 THX SurEX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
BRIGHTNESS
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
L7 TV
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
L7 MUSIC
L7 MUSIC SURR
DOLBY PLII + THX
DOLBY PLII MOVIE
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
dts NEO:6 FILM
dts NEO:6 MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
ZONE2 BALANCE
dts(-ES) L7 FILM
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC
dts (-ES) THX
dts THX MUSIC
dts(-ES)
VOLUME CONTROL
SETUP
SETTING
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
dts(-ES) 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
ZONE PWR ON
CATHEDRAL
2CH BYPASS
A-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|